VSX-51
VSX-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Safety of Your Ears is in Your Hands
Get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a
safe level – a level that lets the sound come through
clearly without annoying blaring or distortion and, most
importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing.
Sound can be deceiving. Over time, your hearing
“comfort level” adapts to higher volumes of sound, so
what sounds “normal” can actually be loud and
harmful to your hearing. Guard against this by setting
your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your hearing
adapts.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
THE MODEL NUMBER AND SERIAL NUMBER OF
THIS EQUIPMENT ARE ON THE REAR OR BOTTOM.
RECORD THESE NUMBERS ON YOUR ENCLOSED
WARRANTY CARD AND KEEP IN A SAFE PLACE
FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.
D36-AP9-1_A1_En
CAUTION
This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded
cables and connectors are used to connect the unit
to other equipment. To prevent electromagnetic
interference with electric appliances such as radios
and televisions, use shielded cables and connectors
ESTABLISH A SAFE LEVEL:
• Set your volume control at a low setting.
• Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it
comfortably and clearly, without distortion.
• Once you have established a comfortable sound
level, set the dial and leave it there.
for connections.
D8-10-3a_A1_En
BE SURE TO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING
This product is for general household purposes. Any
failure due to use for other than household purposes
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires
repair will be charged for even during the warranty
GUIDELINES:
• Do not turn up the volume so high that you can’t
hear what’s around you.
• Use caution or temporarily discontinue use in
potentially hazardous situations.
• Do not use headphones while operating a motorized
vehicle; the use of headphones may create a traffic
period.
K041_A1_En
hazard and is illegal in many areas.
S001a_A1_En
This Class B digital apparatus complies with
Canadian ICES-003.
D8-10-1-3_A1_En
CAUTION:
HOT SURFACE. DO NOT TOUCH.
The top surface over the internal
heatsink may become hot when
operating this product continuously.
En
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MULTI-ZONE setup....................................... 20
Connecting a SiriusConnect Tuner............. 21
Connecting to the network through
LAN interface ................................................ 21
Connecting optional Bluetooth
ADAPTER ...................................................... 21
Connecting an iPod...................................... 22
Connecting a USB device............................ 22
Connecting an HDMI-equipped
component to the front panel input............ 22
Connecting to the front panel video
terminal ......................................................... 22
Connecting to a wireless LAN ..................... 22
Connecting an IR receiver ........................... 23
Operating other Pioneer components
with this unit’s sensor.................................. 23
Switching components on and off
Multi Operation and System Off.................. 55
Resetting the remote control settings........ 56
Controlling components.............................. 56
07 Playback with HOME MEDIA
Thank you for buying this Pioneer
product. Please read through these
operating instructions so you will
know how to operate your model
properly. After you have finished read-
ing the instructions, put them away
in a safe place for future reference.
GALLERY inputs
Enjoying the Home Media Gallery............... 39
Features of Home Media Gallery................. 39
Introduction................................................... 39
Playback with Home Media Gallery ............ 40
Advanced operations for Internet radio...... 41
About network playback............................... 41
About playable file formats.......................... 43
11 The Advanced MCACC menu
Making receiver settings from the
Advanced MCACC menu............................. 59
Automatic MCACC (Expert)......................... 59
Manual MCACC setup ................................. 61
Checking MCACC Data................................ 63
Data Management........................................ 64
Contents
01 Before you start
08 Control with HDMI function
About the Control with HDMI function....... 44
Making Control with HDMI connections.... 44
HDMI Setup................................................... 44
Before using synchronization...................... 45
About synchronized operations .................. 45
Setting the PQLS function........................... 45
Cautions on the Control with HDMI
12 The System Setup and Other
Checking what’s in the box............................ 6
Installing the receiver..................................... 6
Loading the batteries...................................... 6
Operating range of remote control unit........ 6
About operation of the receiver with a
mobile terminal (iPod, iPhone, etc.) ............. 6
About using AVNavigator (included
Setup menus
Making receiver settings from the
System Setup menu..................................... 65
Manual speaker setup.................................. 65
Network Setup menu ................................... 67
Checking the Network Information............. 69
The Other Setup menu................................. 69
using the 12 volt trigger................................ 23
Plugging in the receiver............................... 24
function ......................................................... 46
CD-ROM) ......................................................... 6
04 Basic Setup
09 Using other functions
Changing the OSD display language
(OSD Language) ........................................... 25
Automatically conducting optimum
sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) ............... 25
The Input Setup menu.................................. 26
Operation Mode Setup................................. 27
Setting the Audio options ............................ 47
Setting the Video options............................. 49
Switching the speaker terminals ................ 50
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls................. 50
Making an audio or a video recording........ 51
Reducing the level of an analog signal....... 51
Using the sleep timer................................... 51
Dimming the display.................................... 51
Checking your system settings ................... 51
Resetting the system.................................... 51
13 Additional information
02 Controls and displays
Troubleshooting 1......................................... 71
Troubleshooting 2......................................... 77
Troubleshooting of wireless LAN ................ 79
About status messages ............................... 80
Important information regarding the
Remote control ............................................... 8
Display............................................................. 9
Front panel .................................................... 10
03 Connecting your equipment
Connecting your equipment........................ 11
Rear panel ..................................................... 11
Determining the speakers’ application ...... 12
Placing the speakers.................................... 13
Connecting the speakers............................. 13
Installing your speaker system.................... 14
Selecting the Speaker system..................... 15
About the audio connection........................ 15
About the video converter............................ 15
About HDMI .................................................. 16
Connecting your TV and playback
HDMI connection ......................................... 81
Cleaning the unit .......................................... 81
Surround sound formats ............................. 81
About iPod..................................................... 81
About SIRIUS................................................ 82
About FLAC ................................................... 82
Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct
with different input signal formats.............. 82
Glossary......................................................... 83
Features index............................................... 86
Specifications ............................................... 87
Preset code list.............................................. 88
05 Basic playback
Playing a source ........................................... 29
Playing an iPod............................................. 29
Playing a USB device ................................... 30
Listening to the radio.................................... 32
Listening to Satellite Radio.......................... 32
Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless
10 Controlling the rest of your system
About the Remote Setup menu................... 53
Operating multiple receivers....................... 53
Setting the remote to control other
Enjoyment of Music...................................... 34
components.................................................. 53
Selecting preset codes directly ................... 53
Programming signals from other
remote controls............................................. 54
Erasing one of the remote control
button settings.............................................. 54
Erasing all learnt settings that are in
one input function ........................................ 54
Direct function.............................................. 54
06 Listening to your system
Auto playback ............................................... 36
Listening in surround sound ....................... 36
Using Stream Direct..................................... 37
Selecting MCACC presets ........................... 37
Choosing the input signal............................ 37
Better sound using Phase Control.............. 38
components.................................................. 17
Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, BD
recorder and other video sources ............... 18
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or
other set-top box ........................................... 19
Connecting other audio components......... 19
Connecting AM/FM antennas..................... 20
En
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
8
MCACC speaker settings
! Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 25
Flow of settings on the receiver
j
The Input Setup menu (page 26)
Flow for connecting and setting the receiver
(When using connections other than the recommended connections)
The unit is a full-fledged AV receiver equipped with an abundance of functions and terminals. It can
be used easily after following the procedure below to make the connections and settings.
Required setting item: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 9
j
9
Basic playback (page 29)
j
Setting to be made as necessary: 6, 8, 10, 11, 12
10 Adjusting the sound and picture quality as desired
! Using the various listening modes (page 36)
! Better sound using Phase Control (page 38)
! Measuring the all EQ type (SYMMETRY/ALL CH ADJ/FRONT ALIGN) (page 59)
! Changing the channel level while listening (page 66)
! Switching on/off the Acoustic Calibration EQ, Auto Sound Retriever or Dialog Enhancement (page
47)
Important
The receiver’s initial settings can be made on the computer using Wiring Navi on the AVNavigator
CD-ROM included with the receiver. In this case, virtually the same connections and settings as
in steps 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 can be made interactively. For instructions on using AVNavigator, see
About using AVNavigator (included CD-ROM) on page 6 .
1
Before you start
! Setting the PQLS function (page 45)
! Checking what’s in the box on page 6
! Loading the batteries on page 6
j
! Setting the Audio options (page 47)
! Setting the Video options (page 49)
j
2
Determining the speakers’ application (page 12)
! 7.1 channel surround system (Front height)
11 Other optional adjustments and settings
! Control with HDMI function (page 44)
! The Advanced MCACC menu (page 59)
! The System Setup and Other Setup menus (page 65)
j
! 7.1 channel surround system (Front wide)
! 7.1 channel surround system & Speaker B connection
! 5.1 channel surround system & Front Bi-amping connection (High quality surround)
! 5.1 channel surround system & ZONE 2 connection (Multi Zone)
j
12 Making maximum use of the remote control
! Operating multiple receivers (page 53)
3
Connecting the speakers
! Placing the speakers on page 13
! Connecting the speakers on page 13
! Installing your speaker system on page 14
! Bi-amping your speakers on page 14
j
! Setting the remote to control other components (page 53)
4
Connecting the components
! About the audio connection on page 15
! About the video converter on page 15
! Connecting your TV and playback components on page 17
! Connecting AM/FM antennas on page 20
! Plugging in the receiver on page 24
j
5
Power On
j
6
Changing the OSD display language (OSD Language) (page 25)
j
En
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
01
Before you start
(Symbol examples for batteries)
These symbols are only valid
in the European Union.
Before you start
About using AVNavigator
(included CD-ROM)
The included AVNavigator CD-ROM contains
Wiring Navi allowing you to easily make the
receiver’s connections and initial settings in
dialog fashion. High precision initial settings
can be completed easily simply by following the
instructions on the screen to make the connec-
tions and settings.
There are also other features enabling easy use
of various functions, including an Interactive
Manual that operates in association with the
receiver, updating of various types of software,
and MCACC Application that lets you check the
MCACC measurement results on 3D graphs.
K058c_A1_En
Pb
Checking what’s in the box
Please check that you’ve received the following
supplied accessories:
! Setup microphone (cable: 5 m (16.4 ft.))
! Remote control unit
! AAA size IEC R03 dry cell batteries (to confirm
system operation) x2
! AM loop antenna
! FM wire antenna
! iPod cable
! Power cord
Loading the batteries
The batteries included with the unit are to check
initial operations; they may not last over a long
period. We recommend using alkaline batteries
that have a longer life.
Operating range of remote
control unit
The remote control may not work properly if:
! There are obstacles between the remote
control and the receiver’s remote sensor.
! Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining
onto the remote sensor.
! The receiver is located near a device that is
emitting infrared rays.
! The receiver is operated simultaneously with
another infrared remote control unit.
! CD-ROM (AVNavigator)
! Warranty card
! These operating instructions
WARNING
! Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight
or other excessively hot place, such as inside a
car or near a heater. This can cause batteries
to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire. It
can also reduce the life or performance of
batteries.
Installing AVNavigator
1
Load the included AVNavigator
CD-ROM into your computer’s CD drive.
! The installation screen is displayed. Proceed
to step 2.
! If the installation screen does not appear,
start the installer (AVNV_XXX_xxx.exe).
Installing the receiver
! When installing this unit, make sure to put it
on a level and stable surface.
! Don’t install it on the following places:
—on a color TV (the screen may distort)
—near a cassette deck (or close to a device that
gives off a magnetic field). This may interfere
with the sound.
—in direct sunlight
—in damp or wet areas
—in extremely hot or cold areas
—in places where there is vibration or other
movement
—in places that are very dusty
—in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as
a kitchen)
! Do not touch this receiver’s bottom panel
while the power is on or just after it is turned
off. The bottom panel becomes hot when the
power is on (or right after it is turned off) and
could cause burns.
CAUTION
Incorrect use of batteries may result in such
hazards as leakage and bursting. Observe the
following precautions:
! Never use new and old batteries together.
! Insert the plus and minus sides of the
batteries properly according to the marks in
the battery case.
! Batteries with the same shape may have
different voltages. Do not use different
batteries together.
! When disposing of used batteries, please
comply with governmental regulations or
environmental public instruction’s rules that
apply in your country or area.
2
Follow the instructions on the screen
to install.
When “Finish” is selected, installation is
completed.
30°
30°
3
Remove the included AVNavigator
7 m (23 ft.)
CD-ROM from the computer’s CD drive.
Handling the CD-ROM
About operation of the
receiver with a mobile
terminal (iPod, iPhone, etc.)
The receiver can be controlled from the mobile
terminal by installing a special application on
the mobile terminal. For details, see the product
information on the Pioneer website.
Operating Environment
! This CD-ROM can be used with Microsoft®
Windows® XP/Vista/7.
! A browser is at times used for AVNavigator
functions. The supported browser is Microsoft
Internet Explorer 6, 7 and 8. With other
browsers, some functions may be limited or
the display may not appear properly.
This special application may be changed or
discontinued without notice.
En
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
01
Before you start
Precautions For Use
Using AVNavigator
! This CD-ROM is for use with a personal
computer. It cannot be used with a DVD
player or music CD player. Attempting to play
this CD-ROM with a DVD player or music
CD player can damage speakers or cause
impaired hearing due to the large volume.
Note
To use the AVNavigator of another model, first
uninstall (delete) this receiver’s AVNavigator,
then install the AVNavigator of the other model.
1
Click [AVNavigator] on the desktop to
launch AVNavigator.
AVNavigator is launched and Wiring Navi
starts up. The language selection screen
appears. Follow the instructions on the screen
to make the connections and automatic
settings.
Deleting the AVNavigator
License
You can use the following method to uninstall
(delete) the AVNavigator from your PC.
! Please agree to the “Terms of Use” indicated
below before using this CD-ROM. Do not use if
you are unwilling to consent to the terms of its
use.
Wiring Navi only starts up automatically the
first time AVNavigator is launched.
%
Delete from the Control Panel of the
PC.
2
Select and use the desired function.
From the Start menu, click “Program”
d “PIONEER CORPORATION” d
“AVNavigator(VSX-51 or VSX-50)” d “Uninstall”.
AVNavigator includes the following functions:
! Wiring Navi – Guides you through
connections and initial settings in dialog
fashion. High precision initial settings can be
made easily.
Terms of Use
! Copyright to data provided on this CD-ROM
belongs to PIONEER CORPORATION.
Unauthorized transfer, duplication, broadcast,
public transmission, translation, sales,
lending or other such matters that go beyond
the scope of “personal use” or “citation” as
defined by Copyright Law may be subject
to punitive actions. Permission to use this
CD-ROM is granted under license by PIONEER
CORPORATION.
! Interactive Manual – Automatically displays
the pages explaining the functions that have
been operated on the receiver. It is also
possible to operate the receiver from the
Interactive Manual.
! Glossary – Displays glossary pages.
! MCACC Appli – Displays Advanced
MCACC measurement results vividly on the
computer.
There are special operating instructions
for MCACC Application. These instructions
are included in the AVNavigator
Interactive Manual’s menus. Refer to them
when using MCACC Application.
! Software Update – Allows various types of
software to be updated.
General Disclaimer
! PIONEER CORPORATION does not
guarantee the operation of this CD-ROM with
respect to personal computers using any
of the applicable OS. In addition, PIONEER
CORPORATION is not liable for any damages
incurred as a result of use of this CD-ROM
and is not responsible for any compensation.
The names of private corporations, products
and other entities described herein are the
registered trademarks or trademarks of their
respective firms.
! Settings – Used to make various
AVNavigator settings.
! Detection – Used to detect the receiver.
En
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
02
Controls and displays
11 Remote control LED
Lights when a command is sent from the
remote control.
8
i/j/k/l/ENTER
Controls and displays
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your
surround sound system (see page 59) and the
Audio or Video options (page 47 or 49).
12 TV CTRL
Set the preset code of your TV’s manufacturer
when controlling the TV (page 53).
The remote has been conveniently color-coded
according to component control using the follow-
ing system:
! White – Receiver control, TV control
! Blue – Other controls (See pages 29, 30, 32, 34
and 56.)
Remote control
This section explains how to operate the remote
control for the receiver.
9
Receiver Control buttons
Press first to access:
! PHASE CTRL – Press to switch on/off Phase
Control (page 38).
! STATUS – Press to check selected receiver
settings (page 51).
! PQLS – Press to select the PQLS setting
(page 45).
! S.RETRIEVER – Press to restore CD quality
sound to compressed audio sources (page
47).
! SIGNAL SEL – Use to select an input signal
(page 37).
! MCACC – Press to switch between MCACC
presets (page 37).
! SLEEP – Use to put the receiver in sleep
mode and select the amount of time before
sleep (page 51).
13
Switches the remote to control the receiver
(used to select the white commands).
Switch to perform operations in the main zone.
Also use this button to set up surround sound.
RECEIVER MULTI
OPERATION
SOURCE
1
2,3
RCU SETUP
BDR
11
1
u RECEIVER
BD
DVD
DVR
HDMI
This switches between standby and on for this
receiver.
SAT
TV
14 MASTER VOLUME +/–
Use to set the listening volume.
CD
HMG
ADPT
4
USB
iPod
TV CTRL
2
MULTI OPERATION
TUNER SIRIUS
12
13
RECEIVER
ZONE
2
INPUT SELECT
15 MUTE
Use this button to perform multi operations
(page 55).
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has
been muted (adjusting the volume also restores
the sound).
5
6
MASTER
VOLUME
INPUT
3
RCU SETUP
TV CONTROL
14
15
Use to input the preset code when making
remote control settings and to set the remote
control mode (page 53).
CH
VOL
MUTE
AUDIO
VIDEO
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
LIST TUNE TOOLS
4
Input function buttons
7
8
TOP MENU
BAND
T.EDIT
GUIDE
Press to select control of other components
(page 53).
! CH LEVEL – Press repeatedly to select a
channel, then use k/l to adjust the level
(page 66).
! A.ATT – Attenuates (lowers) the level of an
analog input signal to prevent distortion
(page 51).
PRESET
ENTER
PRESET
Use INPUT SELECT c/ d to select the input
function (page 29).
CATEGORY
RETURN
HOME
TUNE
MENU
iPod CTRL
5
ZONE 2
PGM MEMORY MENU
HDD
DVD
Switch to perform operations in ZONE 2 (page
PHASE CTRL
STATUS
50).
! DIMMER – Dims or brightens the display
(page 51).
TV
/
DTV
MPX
PQLS
6
TV CONTROL buttons
9
S.RETRIEVER
1
AUDIO
These buttons are dedicated to control the TV
assigned to the TV CTRL button.
10 LISTENING MODE controls
! AUTO/ALC/DIRECT – Switches between
Auto Surround (page 36), Auto Level Control
mode and Stream Direct mode (page 37).
! STEREO – Press to select stereo playback
mode (page 36).
! STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding
and to switch various modes (2 Pro Logic,
Neo:6, etc.) (page 36).
2
3
SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP
INFO
DISP
4
5
6
7
Receiver setting buttons
CH LEVEL A.ATT DIMMER
7
8
9
Press first to access:
! AUDIO PARAMETER – Use to access the
Audio options (page 47).
! VIDEO PARAMETER – Use to access the
Video options (page 49).
! HOME MENU – Use to access the Home
Menu (pages 25, 26, 44, 59 and 65).
! RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the
current menu screen.
CH
D.ACCESS
CLASS
ENTER
/
CLR
ALC
0
AUTO
/
/
DIRECT STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR
10
LISTENING MODE
RECEIVER
! ADV SURR – Use to switch between the
various surround modes (page 36).
En
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
02
Controls and displays
18 Character display
Displays various system information.
8
(PHASE CONTROL)
Display
Lights when the Phase Control is switched on
19 Remote control mode indicator
Lights to indicate the receiver’s remote control
mode setting. (Not displayed when set to 1.)
(page 69)
(page 38).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11
12
13 14
9
Analog signal indicators
2
2
DIGITAL PLUS
TrueHD
DTS HD ES 96/24
DSD PCM
MULTI-ZONE
S.RTRV SOUND UP MIX OVER
TUNED
PQLS ALC ATT STEREO
AUTO
L
C
R
Light to indicate reducing the level of an analog
signal (page 51).
SL
SR
MONO
HDMI
DIGITAL
ANALOG
dB
XL XC XR
TV
DVD
BD DVR
CD TUNER SIRIUS
CD-R
VIDEO HMG USB
HDMI
MSTR
LFE
10 Tuner indicators
! TUNED – Lights when a broadcast is being
received.
! STEREO – Lights when a stereo FM
broadcast is being received in auto stereo
mode.
iPod
[ 2 ] [ 3 ]
[ 4 ]
AUTO SURROUND
STREAM DIRECT
PROLOGIC x
ADV.SURROUND
2
Neo:6
STANDARD
SLEEP
SP AB
7
15
16 17
18
19
! MONO – Lights when the mono mode is set
using MPX.
! 96/24 – Lights with DTS 96/24 decoding.
! DSD PCM – Light during DSD (Direct Stream
Digital) to PCM conversion with SACDs.
! PCM – Lights during playback of PCM
signals.
1
Signal indicators
Light to indicate the currently selected input
signal. AUTO lights when the receiver is set to
select the input signal automatically (page 37).
11
Lights when the sound is muted.
2
Program format indicators
12 Master volume level
! MSTR – Lights during playback of DTS-HD
Master Audio signals.
Light to indicate the channels to which digital
signals are being input.
! L/R – Left front/Right front channel
! C – Center channel
! SL/SR – Left surround/Right surround
channel
! LFE – Low frequency effects channel (the (( ))
indicators light when an LFE signal is being
input)
! XL/XR – Two channels other than the ones
above
! XC – Either one channel other than the ones
above, the mono surround channel or matrix
encode flag
Shows the overall volume level.
“---” indicates the minimum level, and “+12dB”
indicates the maximum level.
4
MULTI-ZONE
Lights when the MULTI-ZONE feature is active
(page 50).
13 Input function indicators
Light to indicate the input function you have
selected.
5
SOUND
Lights when the DIALOG E (Dialog
Enhancement) or TONE (tone controls) features
is selected (page 47).
14 Scroll indicators
Light when there are more selectable items
when making the various settings.
6
S.RTRV
15 Speaker indicators
Lights to indicate the current speaker system
using SPEAKERS (page 50).
Lights when the Sound Retriever function is
active (page 47).
7
Listening mode indicators
16 SLEEP
! AUTO SURROUND – Lights when the Auto
Surround feature is switched on (page 36).
! ALC – Lights when the ALC (Auto level
control) mode is selected (page 36).
! STREAM DIRECT – Lights when Direct/Pure
Direct is selected (page 37).
! ADV.SURROUND – Lights when one of
the Advanced Surround modes has been
selected (page 36).
3
Digital format indicators
Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode (page
51).
Light when a signal encoded in the correspond-
ing format is detected.
! 2 DIGITAL – Lights with Dolby Digital
decoding.
! 2 DIGITAL PLUS – Lights with Dolby Digital
Plus decoding.
! 2 TrueHD – Lights with Dolby TrueHD
decoding.
! DTS – Lights with DTS decoding.
! DTS HD – Lights with DTS-HD decoding.
17 Matrix decoding format indicators
! 2PRO LOGIC IIx – This lights to indicate 2
Pro Logic II / 2 Pro Logic IIx decoding (page
36).
! Neo:6 – When one of the Neo:6 modes of the
receiver is on, this lights to indicate Neo:6
processing (page 36).
! STANDARD – Lights when one of the
Standard Surround modes is switched on
(page 36).
En
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
02
Controls and displays
7
Remote sensor
Front panel
Receives the signals from the remote control
(page 6).
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
7
8
8
9
MASTER VOLUME dial
SPEAKERS
VSX-51
Use to change the speaker terminal (page 50).
ADVANCED
MCACC
FL OFF
HDMI
iPod iPhone iPad
10 PHONES jack
Use to connect headphones. When the head-
phones are connected, there is no sound output
from the speakers.
SPEAKERS
CONTROL
–
MULTI-ZONE
–
ON/OFF
BAND
TUNER EDIT
TUNE
PRESET
ENTER
AUTO SURR/ALC/
STREAM DIRECT
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
iPod iPhone iPad
DIRECT CONTROL
STEREO
INPUT
SELECTOR
MASTER
VOLUME
11 Listening mode buttons
! AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT –
Switches between Auto Surround (page 36),
Auto Level Control and Stream Direct mode
(page 37).
STANDBY/ON
PHONES
5V
2.1A
iPod
iPhone
iPad
USB
HDMI
2
INPUT
MCACC
SETUP MIC
! STANDARD SURROUND – Press for
Standard decoding and to switch various
modes (2 Pro Logic, Neo:6, Stereo etc.)
(page 36).
9
10 11
12 13
14
16
VSX-51
VIDEO
2
INPUT
5V
2.1A
iPod
USB
MCACC
iPhone
VIDEO iPad
SETUP MIC
L
AUDIO
R
! ADVANCED SURROUND – Use to switch
between the various surround modes (page
36).
VSX-50
12
15
13
! STEREO – Press to select stereo playback
mode (page 36).
1
u STANDBY/ON
4
MULTI-ZONE controls
This switches between standby and on for this
receiver.
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (page
20) use these controls to control the sub zone
from the main zone (page 50).
12 MCACC SETUP MIC jack
Use to connect the supplied microphone (page
25).
2
INPUT SELECTOR dial
Use to select an input function.
5
Character display
13 iPod iPhone iPad USB terminals
Use to connect your Apple iPod/iPhone/iPad as
an audio and video source (page 22), or con-
nect a USB device for audio and photo playback
(page 22).
See Display on page 9 .
3
Indicators
! ADVANCED MCACC – Lights when EQ is
set to ON in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu
(page 47).
6
TUNER controls
! BAND – Switches between AM and FM radio
bands (page 32).
! FL OFF – Lights when “off” (nothing
displayed) is selected with the display’s
dimmer adjustment (page 51).
! HDMI – Blinks when connecting an HDMI-
equipped component; lights when the
component is connected (page 17).
! iPod iPhone iPad – Lights to indicate iPod/
iPhone/iPad is connected (page 22).
! TUNER EDIT – Use with TUNE i/j, PRESET
k/l and ENTER to memorize and name
stations for recall (page 32).
! TUNE i/j – Find radio frequencies (page
32).
14 HDMI input connector
Use for connection to a compatible HDMI
device (Video camera, etc.) (page 22).
15 AUDIO/VIDEO input
See Connecting to the front panel video terminal
on page 22 .
! PRESET k/l – Find preset stations (page
32).
16 iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT CONTROL
Change the receiver’s input to the iPod and
enable iPod operations on the iPod (page 30).
En
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
03
Connecting your equipment
VSX-50
Connecting your equipment
(
)
10/100 COAXIAL
LAN
)
VIDEO 1 IN
BD IN
DVD IN
DVR/BDR IN
OUT
HDMI
VIDEO
IN
1
IN
2
IN
1
DC OUTPUT
OPTICAL
ASSIGNABLE
forWIRELESS LAN
ASSIGNABLE
AC IN
(
OUTPUT 5V
0.6 A MAX
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD
TV/SAT DVR/BDR
AUDIO
DVR/BDR CD-R/TAPE ZONE 2
CONTROL
Connecting your equipment
This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesn’t have to be difficult. This
chapter explains the kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system.
IN
ADAPTER PORT
L
MONITOR TV/SAT VIDEO 1
(
OUTPUT 5 V
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
R
)
0.1 A MAX
IR
IN
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL
75
DVR/
BDR
CD
L
OUT
AM LOOP
A
12V
1
2
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
FRONT HEIGHT / WIDE /
R
L
SURRROUND BACK / ZONE 2
L
R
L
SIRIUS
TRIGGER
IN
R
OUT
IN
DVD IN IN
B
(
)
Single
R
L
IN
1
(OUTPUT
12V
(
)
DVD
ASSIGN
CAUTION
IN
ABLE
TOTAL
150 mA
MAX)
IN
2
L
IN
R
(
DVR/
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord
from the power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.
)
BDR
IN
SUBWOOFER
MONITOR
OUT
Y
PB
PR
TV/SAT VIDEO 1 DVD
CAUTION:
ATTENTION:
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE
16 16
SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D’EMPLOI
RS-232C
PRE OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
SPEAKERS
Class 2Wiring
6
-
.
6
-
.
Important
Illustration shows the VSX-51, however connections for the VSX-50 are the same except where
noted.
Note
! The RS-232C terminal is exclusively for the installer.
! The input functions below are assigned by default to the receiver’s different input terminals. Refer to
The Input Setup menu on page 26 to change the assignments if other connections are used.
Rear panel
VSX-51
Input Terminals
Input function
ASSIGNABLE
Digital
HDMI
(DVD)
(BD)
Component
(
)
10/100 COAXIAL
1
VIDEO IN
BD IN
DVD IN
DVR/BDR IN
OUT
LAN
)
IN
HDMI
IN
1
IN
2
IN
1
IN
2
ASSIGNABLE
1
DC OUTPUT
OPTICAL
ASSIGNABLE
forWIRELESS LAN
DVD
BD
COAX-1
IN 1
AC IN
(
OUTPUT 5V
0.6 A MAX
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD
CD
TV/SAT DVR/BDR
AUDIO
DVR/BDR CD-R/TAPE ZONE 2
VIDEO
ZONE 2
CONTROL
IN
ADAPTER PORT
OUT
L
TV/SAT VIDEO
(
OUTPUT 5 V
OUT
IN
IN
TV/SAT
DVR/BDR
OPT-1
OPT-2
OUT
OUT
R
)
MONITOR
OUT
0.1 A MAX
IR
IN
ANTENNA
(DVR/BDR)
IN 2
FM UNBAL
75
DVR/
BDR
CD
L
OUT
AM LOOP
A
12V
1
2
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
FRONT HEIGHT / WIDE /
R
L
SURRROUND BACK / ZONE 2
L
R
L
TRIGGER
SIRIUS
OUT
IN
DVD IN IN
IN
R
B
VIDEO
<a>
(
)
Single
R
L
(VIDEO)
IN
1
(OUTPUT
12V
(
)
DVD
ASSIGN
IN
ABLE
TOTAL
150 mA
MAX)
IN
2
L
IN
R
(
DVR/
VIDEO 1
<b>
)
BDR
IN
(VIDEO 1)
IN 1
SUBWOOFER
MONITOR
OUT
Y
PB
PR
TV/SAT VIDEO
DVD
CAUTION:
ATTENTION:
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE
16 16
SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D’EMPLOI
HDMI 1
<a>
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
PRE OUT
SPEAKERS
Class 2Wiring
6
-
.
6
-
.
HDMI 2
<a>
(HDMI 2)
COAX-2
<a>
CD
a
b
VSX-51 only
VSX-50 only
En
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
03
Connecting your equipment
(C), the left and right front height speakers
(FHL/FHR), the left and right surround speakers
(SL/SR), the left and right surround back speak-
ers (SBL/SBR), and the subwoofer (SW).
It is not possible to produce sound simultane-
ously from the front height or front wide speak-
ers and the surround back speakers.
[E] 5.1 channel surround system & ZONE 2
connection (Multi Zone)
Determining the speakers’
application
This unit permits you to build various surround
systems, in accordance with the number of
speakers you have.
! Be sure to connect speakers to the front left
and right channels (L and R).
! It is also possible to only connect one of the
surround back speakers (SB) or neither.
Choose one from Plans [A] to [E] below.
! Speaker System setting: ZONE 2
With these connections you can simultaneously
enjoy 5.1-channel surround sound in the main
zone with stereo playback on another compo-
nent in ZONE 2. (The selection of input devices
is limited.)
R
C
L
R
L
SR
This surround system produces a more true-to-
life sound from above.
SW
[B] 7.1 channel surround system (Front
wide)
SBR
Main zone
R
SL
Speaker B
SBL
! Speaker System setting: Normal(SB/FW)
L
Important
C
! The Speaker System setting must be made if
you use any of the connections shown below
other than [A] (see Speaker system setting on
page 65 ).
! Sound does not come through simultaneously
from the front height, front wide, speaker B
and surround back speakers. Output speakers
are different depending on the input signal or
listening mode.
With these connections you can simultaneously
enjoy 5.1-channel surround sound in the main
zone with stereo playback of the same sound
on the B speakers. The same connections also
allow for 7.1-channel surround sound in the
main zone when not using the B speakers.
SW
R
FWR
L
SR
Sub zone
C
SL
SR
SW
[D] 5.1 channel surround system & Front
Bi-amping connection (High quality
surround)
! Speaker System setting: Front Bi-Amp
Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for
high sound quality with 5.1-channel surround
sound.
FWL
R
SBR
L
ZONE 2
SL
[A] 7.1 channel surround system (Front
height)
*Default setting
SBL
! Speaker System setting: Normal(SB/FH)
This plan replaces the left and right front height
speakers shown in [A] with the left and right
front wide speakers (FWL/FWR).
It is not possible to produce sound simultane-
ously from the front height or front wide speak-
ers and the surround back speakers.
Other speaker connections
Front Bi-Amp
FHR
! Your favorite speaker connections can be
selected even if you have fewer than 5.1
speakers (except front left/right speakers).
! When not connecting a subwoofer, connect
speakers with low frequency reproduction
capabilities to the front channel. (The
subwoofer’s low frequency component
is played from the front speakers, so the
speakers could be damaged.)
! After connecting, be sure to conduct the
Full Auto MCACC (speaker environment
setting) procedure. See Automatically
conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto
MCACC) on page 25 .
FHL
R
R
L
This surround system produces a true-to-life
sound over a wider area.
C
L
SR
C
SW
SW
[C] 7.1 channel surround system & Speaker
B connection
! Speaker System setting: Speaker B
SBR
SL
SR
SBL
SL
A 7.1 ch surround system connects the left and
right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker
En
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
03
Connecting your equipment
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a
wall is not recommended.
! For the best stereo effect, place the front
speakers 2 m to 3 m (6 ft. to 9 ft.) apart, at
equal distance from the TV.
! If you’re going to place speakers around your
CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your
CRT TV.
Placing the speakers
Refer to the chart below for placement of the
speakers you intend to connect.
Connecting the speakers
Note
! Please refer to the manual that came with
your speakers for details on how to connect
the other end of the speaker cables to your
speakers.
! Use an RCA cable to connect the subwoofer.
It is not possible to connect using speaker
cables.
Each speaker connection on the receiver com-
prises a positive (+) and negative (–) terminal.
Make sure to match these up with the terminals
on the speakers themselves.
SW
FHL
L
FHR
R
C
CAUTION
! These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS
LIVE voltage. To prevent the risk of electric
shock when connecting or disconnecting the
speaker cables, disconnect the power cord
before touching any uninsulated parts.
! Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is
twisted together and inserted fully into the
speaker terminal. If any of the bare speaker
wire touches the back panel it may cause the
power to cut off as a safety measure.
! If you’re using a center speaker, place the
front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
! Place the center speaker above or below the
TV so that the sound of the center channel is
localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the
center speaker does not cross the line formed
by the leading edge of the front left and right
speakers.
! It is best to angle the speakers towards the
listening position. The angle depends on
the size of the room. Use less of an angle for
bigger rooms.
! Surround and surround back speakers
should be positioned 60 cm to 90 cm (2 ft. to
3 ft.) higher than your ears and tilted slightly
downward. Make sure the speakers don’t
face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers
should be more directly behind the listener
than for home theater playback.
30 30
FWL
SL
FWR
SR
Banana plug connections
60
120
60
120
If you want to use speaker cables terminated
with banana plugs, screw the speaker terminal
fully shut, then plug the banana plug into the
end of the speaker terminal.
60
SBL
SB
SBR
! Place the surround speakers at 120º from
the center. If you, (1) use the surround
back speaker, and, (2) don’t use the front
height speakers / front wide speakers, we
recommend placing the surround speaker
right beside you.
! If you intend to connect only one surround
back speaker, place it directly behind you.
! Place the left and right front height speakers
at least one meter (3.3 ft.) directly above the
left and right front speakers.
Bare wire connections
CAUTION
Make sure that all speakers are securely
installed. This not only improves sound quality,
but also reduces the risk of damage or injury
resulting from speakers being knocked over or
falling in the event of external shocks such as
earthquakes.
! Try not to place the surround speakers farther
away from the listening position than the front
and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the
surround sound effect.
1
2
Twist exposed wire strands together.
Loosen terminal and insert exposed
Some tips for improving sound
quality
Where you put your speakers in the room has
a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the
best sound from your system.
wire.
3
Tighten terminal.
1
2
3
10 mm (3/8 in.)
! The subwoofer can be placed on the floor.
Ideally, the other speakers should be at about
ear-level when you’re listening to them.
Putting the speakers on the floor (except the
En
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
03
Connecting your equipment
Bi-amping your speakers
Installing your speaker system
Bi-amping is when you connect the high frequency driver and low frequency driver of your speakers
to different amplifiers for better crossover performance. Your speakers must be bi-ampable to do
this (having separate terminals for high and low) and the sound improvement will depend on the
kind of speakers you’re using.
At the very least, front left and right speakers only are necessary. Note that your main surround
speakers should always be connected as a pair, but you can connect just one surround back
speaker if you like (it must be connected to the left surround back terminal).
Standard surround connection
Front left
Front right
Bi-amp compatible
speaker
Bi-amp compatible
speaker
The front height terminals can also be used
for the front wide and Speaker B speakers.
High
High
Center
Front height setting
Low
Low
Front height right
Front height left
Front wide setting
Speaker B setting
Front wide right
Speaker B - right
Front wide left
Speaker B - left
ASSIGNABLE
(
)
10/100 COAXIAL
LAN
IN
1
VIDEO IN
BD IN
DVD IN
DVR/BDR IN
OUT
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
IN
1
IN
2
IN
1
IN
2
1
DC OUTPUT
OPTICAL
ASSIGNABLE
forWIRELESS LAN
AC IN
(OUTPUT 5V
0.6
A
MAX)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD
CD
TV/SAT DVR/BDR
AUDIO
DVR/BDR CD-R/TAPE ZONE
CONTROL VIDEO
2
ZONE
2
IN
ADAPTER PORT
OUT
L
TV/SAT VIDEO
(
OUTPUT
0.1
5
V
OUT
IN
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
R
)
A
MAX
MONITOR
OUT
Front right
Front left
Center
Subwoofer
IR
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL
75
DVR/
BDR
CD
L
OUT
AM LOOP
A
12V
1
2
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
BACK /
(
L
ZONE
2
FRONT HEIGHT
R
/
WIDE
L
/
SURRROUND
TRIGGER
SIRIUS
OUT
IN
DVD IN IN
IN
R
B
)
Single
R
L
R
L
IN
1
(OUTPUT
12V
(
)
DVD
LINE LEVEL
INPUT
ASSIGN
IN
ABLE
TOTAL
150 mA
MAX)
IN
2
L
IN
(
DVR/
)
BDR
IN
SUBWOOFER
MONITOR
OUT
Y
PB
PR
TV/SAT VIDEO
DVD
CAUTION:
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE
16 16
ATTENTION:
SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D’EMPLOI
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
PRE OUT
SPEAKERS
Class 2Wiring
6
-
.
6
-
.
ASSIGNABLE
(
)
10/100 COAXIAL
LAN
IN
1
VIDEO IN
BD IN
DVD IN
DVR/BDR IN
OUT
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
IN
1
IN
IN
1
IN
2
1
DC OUTPUT
2
OPTICAL
forWIRELESS LAN
ASSIGNABLE
AC IN
(OUTPUT 5V
0.6
A
MAX)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD
CD
TV/SAT DVR/BDR
AUDIO
DVR/BDR CD-R/TAPE ZONE
CONTROL VIDEO
2
ZONE
2
IN
ADAPTER PORT
OUT
L
TV/SAT VIDEO
(
OUTPUT
0.1
5
V
OUT
IN
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
R
)
MONITOR
OUT
A
MAX
IR
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL
75
DVR/
BDR
CD
L
Subwoofer
Surround right
Surround left
OUT
AM LOOP
A
12V
1
2
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
BACK /
(
L
ZONE
2
FRONT HEIGHT
/
WIDE
/
R
L
R
L
SURRROUND
R
L
TRIGGER
SIRIUS
OUT
IN
DVD IN IN
IN
B
)
Single
IN
1
(OUTPUT
12V
(
)
DVD
ASSIGN
IN
ABLE
TOTAL
150 mA
MAX)
IN
2
L
IN
R
(
DVR/
)
BDR
IN
SUBWOOFER
MONITOR
OUT
CAUTION
Y
PB
PR
TV/SAT VIDEO
DVD
CAUTION:
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE
16 16
ATTENTION:
SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SELECTABLE
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
PRE OUT
SPEAKERS
Class 2Wiring
VOIR LE MODE D’EMPLOI
6
-
.
6
-
.
! Most speakers with both High and Low terminals have two metal plates that connect the High
to the Low terminals. These must be removed when you are bi-amping the speakers or you could
severely damage the amplifier. See your speaker manual for more information.
! If your speakers have a removable crossover network, make sure you do not remove it for bi-amping.
Doing so may damage your speakers.
The surround back terminals can also be
used for ZONE 2.
5.1 ch surround setting
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
6.1 ch surround setting
7.1 ch surround setting
Surround back
Surround right
Surround left
Surround back right
Surround back left
ZONE 2 setting
ZONE 2 - Right
ZONE 2 - Left
En
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
03
Connecting your equipment
Bi-wiring your speakers
Your speakers can also be bi-wired if they sup-
port bi-amping.
! With these connections, the Speaker System
setting makes no difference.
Bi-Amping setup
Selecting the Speaker system
About the audio connection
Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for
high sound quality with 5.1-channel surround
sound.
The front height terminals can be used for front
wide and Speaker B connections, in addition to
for the front height speakers. Also, the surround
back terminals can be used for bi-amping and
ZONE 2 connections, in addition to for the sur-
round back speakers. Make this setting accord-
ing to the application.
Types of cables and
terminals
Transferable audio
signals
HDMI
HD audio
1
Connect bi-amp compatible speakers
to the front and surround back speaker
terminals.
See Bi-amping your speakers on page 14 .
CAUTION
! Don’t connect different speakers from the
same terminal in this way.
! When bi-wiring as well, heed the cautions for
bi-amping shown above.
Digital (Coaxial)
Digital (Optical)
Conventional digital audio
2
Select ‘Front Bi-Amp’ from the
Front height setup
*Default setting
Speaker System menu.
See Speaker system setting on page 65 to do
this.
%
To bi-wire a speaker, connect two
1
Connect a pair of speakers to the front
speaker cords to the speaker terminal on
height speaker terminals.
See Standard surround connection on page 14 .
RCA (Analog)
(White/Red)
Conventional analog audio
the receiver.
Using a banana plug for the second connection
is recommended.
ZONE 2 setup
With these connections you can simultaneously
enjoy 5.1-channel surround sound in the main
zone with stereo playback on another compo-
nent in ZONE 2.
2
If necessary, select ‘Normal(SB/FH)’
from the Speaker System menu.
See Speaker system setting on page 65 to do
this.
! With an HDMI cable, video and audio signals
can be transferred in high quality over a single
cable.
1
Connect a pair of speakers to the
surround back speaker terminals.
See Standard surround connection on page 14 .
Front wide setup
1
Connect a pair of speakers to the front
2
Select ‘ZONE 2’ from the
height speaker terminals.
See Standard surround connection on page 14 .
Speaker System menu.
See Speaker system setting on page 65 to do
this.
About the video converter
The video converter ensures that all video
sources are output through all of the MONITOR
VIDEO OUT jacks. The only exception is HDMI:
since this resolution cannot be downsampled,
you must connect your monitor/TV to the
receiver’s HDMI output when connecting this
video source.
2
Select ‘Normal(SB/FW)’ from the
Speaker System menu.
See Speaker system setting on page 65 to do
this.
Speaker B setup
You can listen to stereo playback in another
room.
If several video components are assigned to
the same input function (see The Input Setup
menu on page 26 ), the converter gives priority
to HDMI, component, then composite (in that
order).
1
Connect a pair of speakers to the front
height speaker terminals.
See Standard surround connection on page 14 .
2
Select ‘Speaker B’ from the
Speaker System menu.
See Speaker system setting on page 65 to do
this.
En
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
03
Connecting your equipment
! If you connect a component that
is not compatible with HDCP, an
Terminal for connection
with TV monitor
Terminal for connection with
source device
About HDMI
HDCP ERROR message is displayed on the
front panel display. Some components that
are compatible with HDCP still cause this
message to be displayed, but so long as there
is no problem with displaying video this is not
a malfunction.
! Depending on the component you have
connected, using a DVI connection may result
in unreliable signal transfers.
The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed
digital video, as well as almost every kind of
digital audio.
This receiver incorporates High-Definition
Multimedia Interface (HDMI®) technology.
This receiver supports the functions described
below through HDMI connections.
! Digital transfer of uncompressed video
(contents protected by HDCP (1080p/24,
1080p/60, etc.))
! 3D signal transfer
! Deep Color signal transfer
! x.v.Color signal transfer
! ARC (Audio Return Channel)
! Input of multi-channel linear PCM digital
audio signals (192 kHz or less) for up to 8
channels
! Input of the following digital audio formats:
—Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS, High
bitrate audio (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master
Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio),
DVD-Audio, CD, SACD (DSD signal), Video
CD, Super VCD
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
Y
PB
PR
Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO IN
Video signals can be output
! This receiver supports SACD, Dolby Digital
Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master
Audio. To take advantage of these formats,
however, make sure that the component
connected to this receiver also supports the
corresponding format.
Note
! If the video signal does not appear on your
TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on
your component or display. Note that some
components (such as video game units) have
resolutions that may not be converted. In this
case, try switching Digital Video Conversion
(in Setting the Video options on page 49 ) OFF.
! The signal input resolutions that can be
converted from the component video input
for the HDMI output are 480i/576i, 480p/576p,
720p and 1080i. 1080p signals cannot be
converted.
! Use a High Speed HDMI® cable. If an HDMI
cable other than a High Speed HDMI® cable is
used, it may not work properly.
! When an HDMI cable with a built-in equalizer
is connected, it may not operate properly.
! Signal transfer is only possible when
connected to a compatible component.
! HDMI format digital audio transmissions
require a longer time to be recognized. Due to
this, interruption in the audio may occur when
switching between audio formats or beginning
playback.
! Turning on/off the device connected to this
unit’s HDMI OUT terminal during playback,
or disconnecting/connecting the HDMI
cable during playback, may cause noise or
interrupted audio.
! Synchronized operation with components
using the Control with HDMI function (see
Control with HDMI function on page 44 )
! Only signals with an input resolution
of 480i/576i can be converted from the
component video input for the composite
MONITOR OUT terminals.
Note
! An HDMI connection can only be made
with DVI-equipped components compatible
with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital
Content Protection (HDCP). If you choose to
connect to a DVI connector, you will need a
separate adaptor (DVIdHDMI) to do so. A DVI
connection, however, does not support audio
signals. Consult your local audio dealer for
more information.
This item incorporates copy protection technol-
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation.
Reverse engineering and disassembly are
prohibited.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or regis-
tered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC in the
United States and other countries.
“x.v.Color” and
are trade-
marks of Sony Corporation.
En
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
03
Connecting your equipment
Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output
This diagram shows connections of a TV (with HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback com-
ponent with no HDMI output) to the receiver.
Connecting your TV and playback components
Connecting using HDMI
If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped component (Blu-ray Disc player (BD), etc.), you
can connect it to this receiver using a commercially available HDMI cable.
HDMI/DVI-compatible
monitor
DVD player, etc.
If the TV and playback components support the Control with HDMI feature, the convenient Control
with HDMI functions can be used (see Control with HDMI function on page 44 ).
Select one
Select one
HDMI/DVI-compatible
Other HDMI/DVI-
equipped component
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO
AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL OUT
Blu-ray Disc player
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
PR
PB
R
L
ANALOG
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
Y
HDMI IN
HDMI/DVI-compatible
monitor
Select one
HDMI OUT
HDMI OUT
HDMI IN
AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL OUT
R
L
ANALOG
COAXIAL OPTICAL
This connection is
required in order to
listen to the sound of
the TV over the
VSX-51
only
AS
(
)
10/100 COAXIAL
LAN
IN
1
VIDEO IN
BD IN
DVD IN
DVR/BDR IN
OUT
HDMI
IN
1
IN
2
IN
1
ASSIGNABLE
1
DC OUTPUT
OPTICAL
forWIRELESS LAN
receiver.
ASSIGNABLE
)
TV/SAT DVR/BDR
(
)
MAX
OUTPUT 5V
0.6
A
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
DVD
CD
AUDIO
DVR/BDR CD-R/TAPE ZONE 2
VIDEO
ZONE 2
CONTROL
IN
ADAPTER PORT
V
OUT
L
TV/SAT VIDEO
(
OUTPUT 5
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
R
)
0.1 A MAX
MONITOR
OUT
ALE
IR
IN
(
)
10/100 COAXIAL
LAN
IN
1
VIDEO IN
BD IN
DVD IN
DVR/BDR IN
OUT
HDMI
IN
1
IN
2
ANTENNA
IN
1
2
ASSIGNABLE
1
DC OUTPUT
OPTICAL
ASSIGNABLE
forWIRELESS LAN
FM UNBAL
75
DVR/
BDR
CD
L
OUT
AM LOOP
A
(OUTPUT 5V
0.6
A
MAX)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD
CD
TV/SAT DVR/BDR
12V
1
2
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
BACK
/
(
ZONE
)
2
FR
R
L
R
L
SURRROUND
L
TRIGGER
SIRIUS
OUT
IN
DVD IN IN
IN
R
AUDIO
DVR/BDR CD-R/TAPE ZONE 2
VIDEO
ZONE 2
CONTROL
IN
Single
IN
1
(OUTPUT
1
(
)
DVD
ADAPTER PORT
V
OUT
L
ASSIGN
IN
TV/SAT VIDEO
(
ABLE
OUTPUT 5
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
R
1
)
MONITOR
OUT
0.1 A MAX
IN
2
L
IN
R
(
DVR/
IR
IN
)
ANTENNA
BDR
IN
FM UNBAL
75
DVR/
BDR
CD
L
OUT
S
PRE OUT
AM LOOP
A
MONITOR
OUT
12V
Y
PB
PR
1
2
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
BACK /
(
L
ZONE
2
TV/SAT VIDEO
DVD
R
L
R
L
SURRROUND
TRIGGER
SIRIUS
OUT
IN
DVD IN IN
IN
R
CAUTION:
ATTENTION:
6
)
SELECT
SELECT
A
Single
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE
S-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
SPEAKERS
Class 2Wiring
A
6
-16
.
-16
.
IN
1
(OUTPUT
12V
(
)
DVD
ASSIGN
IN
ABLE
TOTAL
150 mA
MAX)
IN
2
IN
(
DVR/
)
BDR
IN
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
MONITOR
OUT
Y
PB
PR
TV/SAT VIDEO
DVD
CAUTION:
ATTENTION:
SEL
SEL
! If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio
cables (page 17).
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
SPEAKERS
Class 2Wiring
6
-16
.
6
-16
.
—When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI ARC
(Audio Return Channel) function, the sound of the TV is input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT
terminal, so there is no need to connect an audio cable. In this case, set TV Audio at HDMI Setup
to via HDMI (see HDMI Setup on page 44 ).
! If you use an optical digital audio cable, you’ll need to tell the receiver which digital input you
connected the player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 26 ).
! For input components, connections other than HDMI connections are also possible (see
Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output on page 17 ).
! If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio
cables.
—When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI ARC
(Audio Return Channel) function, the sound of the TV is input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT
terminal, so there is no need to connect an audio cable. In this case, set TV Audio at HDMI Setup
to via HDMI (see HDMI Setup on page 44 ).
En
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
03
Connecting your equipment
Connecting your TV with no HDMI input
This diagram shows connections of a TV (with no HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback
component) to the receiver.
! With these connections, the picture is not output to the TV even if the DVD player is connected with
an HDMI cable. Connect the DVD player’s video signals using a composite or component cord.
Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder and other video
sources
This receiver has two sets of audio/video inputs and outputs suitable for connecting analog or digi-
tal video devices, including HDD/DVD recorders and BD recorders.
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the recorder
to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 26 ).
DVD player, etc.
HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder, etc.
TV
Select one
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
Select one
Select one
VIDEO IN
VIDEO
Select one
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO
HDMI OUT
AUDIO OUT
ANALOG
DIGITAL OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
VIDEO IN
VIDEO
AUDIO IN
ANALOG
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO
AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL OUT
COAXIAL OPTICAL
R
L
PR
PB
Y
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
PR
PB
Y
R
L
R
L
ANALOG
A
IN
(
)
10/100 COAXIAL
LAN
IN
1
VIDEO IN
BD IN
DVD IN
DVR/BDR IN
OUT
HDMI
IN
2
IN
1
ASSIGNABLE
1
DC OUTPUT
1
ASSIGNABLE
(
)
10/100 COAXIAL
IN
1
VIDEO IN
BD IN
DVD IN
DVR/BDR IN
OUT
LAN
OPTICAL
ASSIGNABLE
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
forWIRELESS LAN
IN
1
IN
2
IN
1
IN
2
1
DC OUTPUT
OPTICAL
ASSIGNABLE
forWIRELESS LAN
(
)
MAX
OUTPUT 5V
0.6
A
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD
CD
TV/SAT DVR/BDR
AUDIO
DVR/BDR CD-R/TAPE ZONE 2
VIDEO
ZONE 2
CON
IN
(
)
OUTPUT 5V
0.6
A
MAX
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD
CD
TV/SAT DVR/BDR
AUDIO
DVR/BDR CD-R/TAPE ZONE 2
VIDEO
ZONE 2
CONTROL
IN
ADAPTER PORT
V
L
TV/SAT
(
OUTPUT 5
OUT
IN
OUT
OUT
ADAPTER PORT
V
)
MONITOR
OUT
0.1 A MAX
OUT
L
O
(
OUTPUT 5
IR
IN
OUT
NTENNA
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
R
)
0.1 A MAX
MONITOR
OUT
IR
IN
FM UNBAL
5
DVR/
BDR
D
OUT
ANTENNA
AM LOOP
A
12V
FM UNBAL
5
DVR/
BDR
CD
OUT
1
2
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
BACK
/
(
L
ZONE
2
R
L
R
L
SURRROUND
TRIGGER
SIRIUS
OUT
IN
DVD IN IN
IN
)
Single
AM LOOP
A
12V
IN
(
1
(OUTPUT
12V
2
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
BACK
/
(
L
ZONE
2
R
L
L
SURRROUND
TRIGGER
SIRIUS
)
OUT
IN
DVD IN IN
IN
DVD
)
Single
R
ASSIGN
IN
IN
1
ABLE
(O
(
)
TOTAL
150 mA
MAX)
DVD
IN
2
L
IN
R
(
ASSIGN
DVR/
IN
)
ABLE
BDR
IN
TOTAL
150 mA
MAX)
IN
2
L
IN
R
(
DVR/
)
BDR
SUB
PRE OUT
MONITOR
OUT
Y
PB
PR
TV/SAT VIDEO
DVD
CAUTION:
ATTENTION:
SELEC
SELEC
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
SPEAKERS
Class 2Wiring
MONITOR
OUT
6
-16
.
6
-16
.
Y
PB
PR
TV/SAT VIDEO DVD
CAUTION:
ATTENTION:
SELEC
SELEC
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
SPEAKERS
Class 2Wiring
6
-
16
.
6
-16
.
! In order to record, you must connect the analog audio cables (the digital connection is for playback
only) (page 51).
! If your HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder, etc., is equipped with an HDMI output terminal, we
recommend connecting it to the receiver’s HDMI DVR/BDR IN terminal. When doing so, also
connect the receiver and TV by HDMI (see Connecting using HDMI on page 17 ).
! Connect using an HDMI cable to listen to HD audio on the receiver. Do not use an HDMI cable to
input video signals.
Depending on the video component, it may not be possible to output signals connected by HDMI
and other methods simultaneously, and it may be necessary to make output settings. Please refer
to the operating instructions supplied with your component for more information.
! If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio
cables (page 17).
! If you use an optical digital audio cable, you’ll need to tell the receiver which digital input you
connected the player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 26 ).
En
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
03
Connecting your equipment
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other set-top box
Connecting other audio components
Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial digital TV tuners are all examples of so-called ‘set-top
boxes’.
This receiver has both digital and analog inputs, allowing you to connect audio components for
playback.
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the set-top
box to (see The Input Setup menu on page 26 ).
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the compo-
nent to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 26 ).
STB
CD-R, MD, DAT, etc.
Select one
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO
AUDIO OUT
ANALOG
DIGITAL OUT
Select one
R
L
COAXIAL OPTICAL
AUDIO IN
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
ANALOG
DIGITAL OUT
R
L
R
L
COAXIAL OPTICAL
ASSIGNABLE
(
)
10/100 COAXIAL
1
VIDEO IN
BD IN
DVD IN
DVR/BDR IN
OUT
LAN
IN
HDMI
IN
1
IN
2
ASBLE
(
)
10/100 COAXIAL
LAN
IN
1
IN
2
IN
1
VIDEO IN
BD IN
DVD IN
DVR/BDR IN
OUT
HDMI
IN
1
ASSIGNABLE
1
DC OUTPUT
IN
1
IN
2
OPTICAL
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
1
DC OUTPUT
forWIRELESS LAN
OPTICAL
ASSIGNABLE
forWIRELESS LAN
(
)
OUTPUT 5V
0.6
A
MAX
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD
CD
TV/SAT DVR/BDR
(
)
OUTPUT 5V
0.6
A
MAX
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD
CD
TV/SAT DVR/BDR
AUDIO
DVR/BDR CD-R/TAPE ZONE 2
VIDEO
ZONE 2
CONTROL
IN
AUDIO
DVR/BDR CD-R/TAPE ZONE 2
VIDEO
ZONE 2
CONTROL
IN
ADAPTER PORT
V
OUT
L
ADAPTER PORT
V
TV/S
OUT
L
(
OUTPUT 5
OUT
TV/SAT VIDEO
IN
IN
(
OUTPUT 5
OUT
OUT
)
0.1 A MAX
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
R
)
0.1 A MAX
MONITOR
OUT
IR
IN
R
ANTENNA
IR
IN
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL
DVR/
BDR
CD
OUT
FM UNBAL
75
DVR/
BDR
CD
L
OUT
AM LOOP
A
12V
AM LOOP
A
1
2
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
BACK /
(
L
ZONE
2
12V
SIRIUS
TRIGGER
IN
OUT
IN
DVD IN IN
)
Single
1
2
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
BACK
/
(
L
ZONE
2
F
R
L
R
L
SURRROUND
R
L
R
L
SURRROUND
TRIGGER
SIRIUS
OUT
IN
DVD IN IN
IN
R
)
Single
IN
1
(OUTPUT
12V
IN
1
(DVD)
(OUTPUT
12V
(
)
DVD
ASSIGN
ABLE
IN
ASSIGN
IN
ABLE
TOTAL
150 mA
MAX)
IN
(
DVR/
BDR
2
L
IN
R
TOTAL
150 mA
MAX)
IN
2
N
(
)
DVR/
IN
)
BDR
IN
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
MONITOR
OUT
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
MONITOR
OUT
Y
PB
PR
TV/SAT VIDEO DVD
CAUTION:
ATTENTION:
6
SELEC
SELEC
Y
PB
PR
TV/SAT VIDEO
DVD
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE
CAUTION:
ATTENTION:
6
SELECT
SELECT
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
SPEAKERS
Class 2Wiring
6
-16
.
-16
.
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
SPEAKERS
Class 2Wiring
6
-16
.
-16
.
! If you’re connecting a recorder, connect the analog audio outputs to the analog audio inputs on the
recorder.
! If your turntable has line-level outputs (i.e., it has a built-in phono pre-amp), connect it to the CD
inputs instead.
! If your set-top box is equipped with an HDMI output terminal, we recommend connecting it to the
receiver’s HDMI IN 1 terminal. When doing so, also connect the receiver and TV by HDMI (see
Connecting using HDMI on page 17 ).
En
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
03
Connecting your equipment
In case of VSX-50
5
Connect the FM wire antenna into the
Connecting AM/FM antennas
MULTI-ZONE setup
This receiver can power up to two independent
systems in separate rooms after you have made
the proper MULTI-ZONE connections.
Different sources can be playing in two zones at
the same time or, depending on your needs, the
same source can also be used. The main and
sub zone have independent power (the main
zone power can be off while sub zone is on) and
the sub zone can be controlled by the remote or
front panel controls.
FM antenna socket.
Sub Zone Input functions available
For best results, extend the FM antenna fully
and fix to a wall or door frame. Don’t drape
loosely or leave coiled up.
Connect the AM loop antenna and the FM wire
antenna as shown below. To improve reception
and sound quality, connect external antennas
(see Connecting external antennas on page 20 ).
DVD, TV/SAT, DVR/BDR, VIDEO 1,
VIDEO 2, CD, CD-R/TAPE, TUNER,
ADAPTER PORT
ZONE 2
(Output analog audio only.)
Connecting external antennas
To improve FM reception, connect an external
FM antenna to FM UNBAL 75 W.
It is not possible to down-convert the audio
input signal from the HDMI input terminals or
digital input terminals (OPTICAL and COAXIAL)
and output them to ZONE 2.
1
2
Basic MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 2)
3
ANTENNA
5
FM UNBAL
75
1
Connect a separate amplifier to the
75 Ω coaxial cable
AM LOOP
Important
VSX-50 model cannot connect the TV monitor
for sub zone.
AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT jacks on this receiver.
You should have a pair of speakers attached to
the sub zone amplifier as shown in the follow-
ing illustration.
4
ANTENNA
fig. a
fig. b
fig. c
FM UNBAL
75
AM LOOP
Making MULTI-ZONE connections
2
VSX-51 only: Connect a TV monitor
It is possible to make these connections if you
have a separate TV and speakers for the sub
zone (ZONE 2). You will also need a separate
amplifier if you are not using the MULTI-ZONE
setup using speaker terminals (ZONE 2) on page
20 for the sub zone.
to the VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jack on this
receiver.
To improve AM reception, connect a 5 m to 6 m
(16 ft. to 20 ft.) length of vinyl-coated wire to the
AM LOOP terminals without disconnecting the
supplied AM loop antenna.
For the best possible reception, suspend hori-
zontally outdoors.
Sub zone (ZONE 2)
Main zone
1
Pull off the protective shields of both
AM antenna wires.
Push open the tabs, then insert one
VSX-51
only
IN
1
VIDEO IN
BD IN
DVD IN
DVR/BDR IN
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
1
AUDIO
DVR/BDR CD-R/TAPE ZONE
VIDEO
ZONE 2
CO
IN
VIDEO IN
2
2
OUT
L
TV/SAT VIDEO
OUT
IN
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
R
MONITOR
OUT
IR
IN
wire fully into each terminal, then release
the tabs to secure the AM antenna wires.
AN
MULTI-ZONE listening options
FM
75
DVR/
BDR
CD
L
OUT
12V
Outdoor antenna
1
2
TRIGGER
SIR
OUT
DVD IN IN
IN
R
The following table shows the signals that can
be output to ZONE 2:
In case of VSX-51
IN
1
(OUTPUT
12V
(
)
DVD
ASSIGN
ABLE
3
Fix the AM loop antenna to the
TOTAL
150 mA
MAX)
IN
2
L
IN
R
(
DVR/
)
BDR
IN
Indoor antenna
(vinyl-coated wire)
attached stand.
AUDIO IN
MONITOR
OUT
Y
PB
PR
TV/SAT VIDEO
DVD
R
L
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
To fix the stand to the antenna, bend in the
direction indicated by the arrow (fig. a) then clip
the loop onto the stand (fig. b).
! If you plan to mount the AM antenna to a
wall or other surface, secure the stand with
screws (fig. c) before clipping the loop to the
stand. Make sure the reception is clear.
Sub Zone Input functions available
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL
75
DVD, TV/SAT, DVR/BDR, VIDEO,
HOME MEDIA GALLERY, iPod/
AM LOOP
5 m to 6 m
(16 ft. to 20 ft.)
USB, CD, CD-R/TAPE, TUNER,
ADAPTER PORT, SIRIUS
ZONE 2
(Outputs analog audio, composite
video.)
MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker
terminals (ZONE 2)
4
Place the AM antenna on a flat
It is not possible to down-convert the audio
and video input signals from the HDMI input
terminals, digital input terminals (OPTICAL and
COAXIAL) and the COMPONENT VIDEO input
terminals and output them to ZONE 2.
You must select ZONE 2 in Speaker system set-
ting on page 65 to use this setup.
surface and in a direction giving the best
reception.
1
Connect a pair of speakers to the
surround back speaker terminals.
En
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
03
Connecting your equipment
You will also need to connect the antenna and
AC adapter to the SiriusConnectTM tuner.
! For instructions on playing the SIRIUS Radio,
see Listening to Satellite Radio on page 32 .
Turn on the DHCP server function of your
router. In case your router does not have the
built-in DHCP server function, it is necessary
to set up the network manually. For details, see
Network Setup menu on page 67 .
2
VSX-51 only: Connect a TV monitor
Connecting optional Bluetooth
ADAPTER
to the VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jack on this
receiver.
When the Bluetooth® ADAPTER (AS-BT100 or
AS-BT200) is connected to this receiver, a prod-
uct equipped with Bluetooth wireless technol-
ogy (portable cell phone, digital music player,
etc.) can be used to listen to music wirelessly.
! The Bluetooth wireless technology enabled
device must support A2DP profiles.
Sub zone (ZONE 2)
Main zone
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
VIDEO IN
IN
1
HDMI
IN
1
IN
2
IN
1
IN
2
ASSIGNABLE
1
OPTICAL
ASSIGNABLE
LAN terminal specifications
! LAN terminal : Ethernet jack
(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD
CD
TV/SAT DVR/BDR
VSX-51
only
Connecting to the network
through LAN interface
VIDEO
CONTROL
ZONE 2
OUT
TV/SAT
IN
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
VIDEO IN
IR
IN
DVR/
BDR
OUT
By connecting this receiver to the network via
the LAN terminal, you can listen to Internet
radio stations. To listen to Internet radio sta-
tions, you must sign a contract with an ISP
(Internet Service Provider) beforehand.
When connected in this way, you can play audio
files stored on the components on the network,
including your computer, using HOME MEDIA
GALLERY inputs.
12V
1
2
SURROUND
BACK /
(
L
ZONE
2
FRONT HEIG
R
SURRROUND
TRIGGER
OUT
IN
)
Single
R
L
IN
(
1
(OUTPUT
12V
)
DVD
Note
ASSIGN
ABLE
TOTAL
150 mA
MAX)
IN
2
! Pioneer does not guarantee proper connection
and operation of this unit with all Bluetooth
wireless technology enabled devices.
(
DVR/
)
! Refer to the operation manual of the
equipment you have as the connected
equipment and connection method may differ
depending on your Internet environment.
! When using a broadband Internet connection,
a contract with an Internet service provider
is required. For more details, contact your
nearest Internet service provider.
BDR
L
R
MONITOR
OUT
Y
PB
SELECTABLE SEE INST
SELECTABLE VOIR LE
RS-232C
COMPONENT VI
SPEAKERS
Class 2Wiring
M
Bluetooth® ADAPTER
ASSIGNABLE
(
)
10/100 COAXIAL
LAN
DVD IN
DVR/BDR IN
OUT
IN
1
IN
2
IN
1
IN
2
DC OUTPUT
OPTICAL
ASSIGNABLE
forWIRELESS LAN
(
)
OUTPUT 5V
0.6
A
MAX
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD
CD
TV/SAT DVR/BDR
O
R
CD-R/TAPE ZONE 2
ADAPTER PORT
V
L
(
OUTPUT 5
(
)
10/100
C
LAN
OUT
OUT
R
)
0.1 A MAX
DC OUTPUT
forWIRELESS LAN
ANTENNA
Connecting a SiriusConnect
Tuner
To receive SIRIUS Satellite Radio broadcasts,
you will need to activate your SiriusConnectTM
tuner.
FM UNBAL
75
(
)
CD
L
OUTPUT 5V
0.6
A
MAX
AM LOOP
T
CENTER
SURROUND
BACK /
(
L
ZONE
)
2
F
L
R
L
SURRROUND
SIRIUS
IN
R
Single
ADAPTER PORT
V
Internet
Modem
(
OUTPUT 5
)
0.1 A MAX
TENNA
UNBAL
IN
L
IN
R
AM LOOP
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
FRONT
CENTER
RIUS
A
R
L
T
VIDEO DVD
CAUTION:
ATTENTION:
6
SELECT
SELECT
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE
SPEAKERS
Class 2 Wiring
6
-16
.
-16
.
IN
AS
(
)
10/100 COAXIAL
LAN
DVD IN
DVR/BDR IN
OUT
IN
1
DC OUTPUT
forWIRELESS LAN
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
(
)
MAX
OUTPUT 5V
0.6
A
(
)
DVD
CAUTION:
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE
16 16
ATTENTION:
O
R
6
-
.
6
-
.
CD-R/TAPE ZONE 2
Important
ADAPTER PORT
V
L
(
OUTPUT 5
OUT
R
)
0.1 A MAX
! Do not move the receiver with the Bluetooth
ADAPTER connected. Doing so could cause
damage or faulty contact.
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL
75
CD
L
LAN
AM LOOP
A
3
2
1
WAN
FRONT
CENTER
SUR
R
SIRIUS
IN
R
R
L
Router
IN
L
IN
R
%
Switch the receiver into standby
LAN cable
(sold separately)
and connect Bluetooth ADAPTER to the
ADAPTER PORT.
! For instructions on playing the Bluetooth
wireless technology device, see Pairing the
Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless
technology device on page 34 .
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
T
VIDEO DVD
CAUTION:
ATTENTION:
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE
6
-16
.
6
-16
.
to LAN port
Antenna
SiriusConnectTM
HOME tuner
PC
Connect the LAN terminal on this receiver to
the LAN terminal on your router (with or with-
out the built-in DHCP server function) with a
straight LAN cable (CAT 5 or higher).
SIRIUS
H
AC adapter
En
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
03
Connecting your equipment
%
Switch the receiver into standby then
%
Switch the receiver into standby
Connecting an iPod
Connecting to the front panel
video terminal
use the supplied iPod cable to connect
your iPod to the iPod iPhone iPad USB
terminal on the front panel of this
receiver.
! It is also possible to connect using the cable
included with the iPod, but in this case it is not
possible to view pictures via the receiver.
! For the cable connection, also refer to the
operating instructions for your iPod.
! For instructions on playing the iPod, see
Playing an iPod on page 29 .
then connect your USB device to the
USB terminal on the front panel of this
receiver.
! This receiver does not support a USB hub.
! For instructions on playing the USB device,
see Playing a USB device on page 30 .
This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal
that will allow you to control playback of audio
content from your iPod using the controls of
this receiver.
VSX-50 only
Front VIDEO 2 connections are accessed via
the front panel using the INPUT SELECTOR
or INPUT SELECT c/d button on the remote
control. There are standard audio/video jacks.
Hook them up the same way you made the rear
panel connections.
In case of VSX-51
Connecting an HDMI-equipped
component to the front panel
input
VSX-51 only
5V
2.1A
iPod
iPhone
iPad
USB
HDMI 2 INPUT
MCACC
SETUP MIC
Connecting a USB device
VIDEO 2 INPUT
It is possible to play audio and photo files by
connecting USB devices to this receiver. It
is also possible to connect a USB keyboard
(US-international layout) to the receiver to enter
text in the following GUI screens.
5V
2.1A
iPod
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
iPhone
L
AUDIO
R
VIDEO iPad
iPod
iPod cable
(supplied)
5V
2.1A
MENU
! Change the input name in the Input Setup
menu (page 26).
iPod
USB
HDMI 2 INPUT
MCACC
SETUP MIC
iPhone
iPad
! Add names to radio station presets (page 32).
L
R
VIDEO
AUDIO/VIDEO OUTPUT
In case of VSX-50
Video camera
(etc.)
Video camera (etc.)
5V
2.1A
Connecting to a wireless LAN
iPod
iPhone
iPad
VIDEO 2 INPUT
USB
HDMI 2 INPUT
MCACC
SETUP MIC
Wireless connection to the network is possible
through a wireless LAN connection. Use the
separately sold AS-WL300 for connection.
! For instructions on setting the wireless LAN
converter, see Network Setup menu on page
67 .
5V
2.1A
iPod
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
iPhone
L
AUDIO
R
VIDEO iPad
iPod
iPod cable
(supplied)
USB mass
storage device
MENU
USB keyboard
En
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
03
Connecting your equipment
sensor of one component. When you use a
remote control, the control signal is passed
along the chain to the appropriate component.
! If you want to control all your components
using this receiver’s remote control, see page
53.
! If you have connected a remote control to the
CONTROL IN jack (using a mini-plug cable),
you won’t be able to control this unit using the
remote sensor.
1
Connect the IR receiver sensor to the IR
3
Continue the chain in the same way for
ASSIGNABL
(
)
10/100 COAXIAL
LAN
)
OUT
IN
1
IN
2
IN jack on the rear of this receiver.
as many components as you have.
DC OUTPUT
forWIRELESS LAN
(
OUTPUT 5V
0.6
A
MAX
(
)
(
)
DVD
CD
Closet or shelving unit
Pioneer
ADAPTER PO
V
0.1 A MAX
TENNA
UNBAL
Internet
Modem
(
OUTPUT 5
)
Non-Pioneer
Switching components on and
off using the 12 volt trigger
component
component
AM LOOP
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
R
RIUS
A
R
L
You can connect components in your system
(such as a screen or projector) to this receiver
so that they switch on or off using 12 volt
triggers when you select an input function.
However, you must specify which input func-
tions switch on the trigger using the The Input
Setup menu on page 26 . Note that this will only
work with components that have a standby
mode.
IN
CONTROL
IR
IN
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
IN
OUT
CAUTION: ATTENTION:
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE ENCEINTE D’IMPEDANCE DE
16 16
SPEA
6
-
.
6
-
.
Router
IN
1
VIDEO IN
BD IN
DVD IN
DVR/BDR IN
OUT
LAN
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
1
DC OUTPUT
forWIRELESS LAN
WAN
(OUTPUT 5V
0.6
A
MAX)
Important
AUDIO
DVR/BDR CD-R/TAPE ZONE
CONTROL VIDEO
2
ZONE
2
IN
ADAPTER PORT
OUT
L
! Note that if you use this feature, make sure
that you also have at least one set of analog
audio, video or HDMI jacks connected to
another component for grounding purposes.
TV/SAT VIDEO
(
OUTPUT
0.1
5
V
OUT
IN
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
R
)
MONITOR
OUT
A
MAX
IR
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL
75
DVR/
BDR
CD
L
OUT
AM LOOP
A
12V
1
2
FRONT
C
TRIGGER
SIRIUS
OUT
IN
DVD IN IN
IN
R
R
L
IN
1
(OUTPUT
12V
(
)
DVD
ASSIGN
IN
ABLE
TOTAL
150 mA
MAX)
IN
2
L
IN
R
(
DVR/
)
BDR
IN
IN
1
VIDEO IN
BD IN
DVD IN
DVR/BDR IN
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
1
SUBWOOFER
MONITOR
OUT
1
Decide which component you want to
Y
PB
PR
TV/SAT VIDEO
DVD
CAUTION:
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE ENCEINTE D’IMPE
16 16
ATTENTION
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
PRE OUT
6
-
.
6
-
.
DC 5V Ethernet
WPS
AUDIO
DVR/BDR CD-R/TAPE ZONE 2
VIDEO
ZONE 2
CONTROL
IN
use the remote sensor of.
OUT
L
Wireless LAN converter (AS-WL300)
When you want to control any component in the
chain, this is the remote sensor at which you’ll
point the corresponding remote control.
TV/SAT VIDEO
(
O
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
R
MONITOR
OUT
0
IR
IN
ANT
FM UN
75
DVR/
BDR
CD
L
OUT
12V
1
2
TRIGGER
SIRIU
OUT
IN
DVD IN IN
IN
R
IN
1
IR receiver
(OUTPUT
12V
(
DVD
ASSI
2
Connect the CONTROL OUT jack of that
ABLE
Connecting an IR receiver
TOTAL
150 mA
MAX)
IN
2
L
IN
R
(
DVR/
)
BDR
IN
component to the CONTROL IN jack of
another Pioneer component.
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end
for the connection.
If you keep your stereo components in a closed
cabinet or shelving unit, or you wish to use the
sub zone remote control in another zone, you
can use an optional IR receiver (such as a Niles
or Xantech unit) to control your system instead
of the remote sensor on the front panel of this
receiver.
! Remote operation may not be possible if direct
light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining
on the IR receiver remote sensor window.
! Note that other manufacturers may not use
the IR terminology. Refer to the manual that
came with your component to check for IR
compatibility.
SU
2
Connect the IR IN jack of another
MONITOR
OUT
Y
PB
PR
TV/SAT VIDEO
DVD
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
component to the IR OUT jack on the rear
of this receiver to link it to the IR receiver.
Please see the manual supplied with your IR
receiver for the type of cable necessary for the
connection.
! If you want to link a Pioneer component to
the IR receiver, see Operating other Pioneer
components with this unit’s sensor on page
23 to connect to the CONTROL jacks instead
of the IR OUT jack.
12 V TRIGGER
INPUT
IN
1
VIDEO IN
BD IN
DVD IN
DVR/BD
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
1
AUDIO
DVR/BDR CD-R/TAPE ZONE 2
VIDEO
ZONE 2
CONTROL
IN
OUT
L
%
Connect the 12 V TRIGGER jack of this
receiver to the 12 V trigger of another
TV/SAT VIDEO
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
R
MONITOR
O
IR
IN
DVR/
BDR
CD
L
OUT
12V
component.
1
2
TRIGGER
OUT
IN
DVD IN IN
IN
R
IN
(
1
(OUTPUT
12V
)
DVD
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end
for the connection.
After you’ve specified the input functions that
will switch on the trigger, you’ll be able to
switch the component on or off just by pressing
the input function(s) you’ve set on page 26.
ASSIGN
ABLE
TOTAL
150 mA
MAX)
IN
2
L
IN
R
(
DVR/
)
BDR
IN
MONITOR
OUT
Y
PB
PR
TV/SAT VIDEO
DVD
RS-232C
COMPONENT VIDEO
Operating other Pioneer
components with this unit’s
sensor
Many Pioneer components have SR CONTROL
jacks which can be used to link components
together so that you can use just the remote
! If using two remote controls (at the same
time), the IR receiver’s remote sensor takes
priority over the remote sensor on the front
panel.
IN
OUT
INCONTROOLUT
CONTROL
En
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
03
Connecting your equipment
you can skip this process. For details about
the Control with HDMI feature, see Control
with HDMI function on page 44 .
Plugging in the receiver
Only plug in after you have connected all your
components to this receiver, including the
speakers.
CAUTION
! Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do
not pull out the plug by tugging the cord, and
never touch the power cord when your hands
are wet, as this could cause a short circuit or
electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of
furniture, or other object on the power cord or
pinch the cord in any other way. Never make
a knot in the cord or tie it with other cables.
The power cords should be routed so that they
are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged
power cord can cause a fire or give you an
electric shock. Check the power cord once in a
while. If you find it damaged, ask your nearest
Pioneer authorized independent service
company for a replacement.
! Do not use any power cord other than the one
supplied with this unit.
! Do not use the supplied power cord for any
purpose other than that described below.
! The receiver should be disconnected by
removing the mains plug from the wall
socket when not in regular use, e.g., when on
vacation.
1
Plug the supplied power cord into the
AC IN socket on the back of the receiver.
2
Plug the other end into a power outlet.
! After this receiver is connected to an AC
outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI
initialization process begins. You cannot
carry out any operations during this process.
The HDMI indicator in the front panel display
blinks during this process, and you can turn
on this receiver once it has stopped blinking.
When you set the Control with HDMI to OFF,
En
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
04
Basic Setup
! If you leave the GUI screen for over five
minutes, the screen saver will appear.
2
Connect the microphone to the MCACC
Basic Setup
SETUP MIC jack on the front panel.
3
Select the parameters you want to set.
! When data measurement is taken, the
reverb characteristics data (both before- and
after-calibration) that this receiver had been
storing will be overwritten.
Changing the OSD display
language (OSD Language)
The language used on the Graphical User
Interface screen can be changed.
! The explanations in these operating
instructions are for when English is selected
for the GUI screen.
Automatically conducting
optimum sound tuning (Full
Auto MCACC)
The Full Auto MCACC Setup measures the
acoustic characteristics of your listening area,
taking into account ambient noise, speaker
connection and speaker size, and tests for both
channel delay and channel level. After you have
set up the microphone provided with your sys-
tem, the receiver uses the information from a
series of test tones to optimize the speaker set-
tings and equalization for your particular room.
! When measurement is taken of the reverb
characteristics data other than SYMMETRY,
the data are not measured after the
correction. If you will need to measure after
correcting data, take the measurement
using the EQ Professional menu in the
Manual MCACC setup (page 61).
If the speakers are connected using any setup
other than Normal(SB/FH), be sure to set
Speaker System before the Full Auto MCACC
Setup. See Speaker system setting on page 65 .
! Speaker System – Shows the current
settings. When this is selected and ENTER is
pressed, the speaker system selection screen
appears. Select the proper speaker system,
then press RETURN to return.
5V
2.1A
iPod
iPhone
iPad
USB
HDMI 2 INPUT
MCACC
SETUP MIC
1
Press u RECEIVER to switch on the
Microphone
receiver and your TV.
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to
this receiver (for example, if you connected this
receiver to the VIDEO jacks on your TV, make
sure that the VIDEO input is now selected).
Tripod
Important
2
Press
on the remote control,
! Make sure the microphone and speakers are
not moved during the Full Auto MCACC Setup.
! Using the Full Auto MCACC Setup will
overwrite any existing settings for the MCACC
preset you select.
then press HOME MENU.
Make sure there are no obstacles between the
speakers and the microphone.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and
ENTER to navigate through the screens and
select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the
current menu.
If you have a tripod, use it to place the micro-
phone so that it’s about ear level at your
normal listening position. If you do not have
a tripod, use some other object to install the
microphone.
Install the microphone on a stable floor.
Placing the microphone on any of the following
surfaces may make accurate measurement
impossible:
If you are planning on bi-amping your front
speakers, or setting up a separate speaker
system in another room, read through
Speaker system setting on page 65 and make
sure to connect your speakers as necessary
before continuing to step 4.
! Before using the Full Auto MCACC Setup, the
headphones should be disconnected.
3
Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home
Menu.
CAUTION
! The test tones used in the Full Auto MCACC
Setup are output at high volume.
THX®
! THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may
be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights
reserved.
4
Select ‘OSD Language’ from the
System Setup menu.
! EQ Type – This determines how the
frequency balance is adjusted.
5
6
Select the desired language.
! Sofas or other soft surfaces.
! MCACC – The six MCACC presets are used
for storing surround sound settings for
different listening positions. Simply choose
an unused preset for now (you can rename it
later in Data Management on page 64 ).
! THX Speaker – Select YES when using THX
speakers (all speakers other than the front
speakers are set to SMALL). In other cases,
leave at NO.
Select ‘OK’ to change the language.
! High places such as tabletops and sofa tops.
The Full Auto MCACC display appears once the
microphone is connected.
The setting is completed and the System Setup
menu reappears automatically.
1
Press u RECEIVER to switch on the
1a.Full Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
receiver and your TV.
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this
receiver.
(
)
Speaker System
EQ Type
: Normal SB/FH
SYMMETRY
:
MCACC
: M1.MEMORY 1
THX Speaker
:
NO
START
4
Press
then select START.
Exit
Return
En
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
04
Basic Setup
there may be a problem with the speaker
connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work,
turn off the power and check the speaker
connections. If there doesn’t seem to be a
problem, you can simply use i/j to select
the speaker and k/l to change the setting
and continue.
! If the speaker is not pointed to the
microphone (listening position) or when
using speakers that affect the phase
(dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.),
Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the
speakers are properly connected.
If Reverse Phase is displayed, the speaker’s
wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the
speaker connections.
! Depending on the characteristics of your
room, sometimes identical speakers with
cone sizes of around 12 cm (5 inches) will
end up with different size settings. You
can correct the setting manually using the
Manual speaker setup on page 65 .
! The subwoofer distance setting may be
farther than the actual distance from the
listening position. This setting should
be accurate (taking delay and room
characteristics into account) and generally
does not need to be changed.
! If Full Auto MCACC Setup measurement
results are incorrect due to the interaction of
the speakers and viewing environment, we
recommend adjusting the settings manually.
5
Follow the instructions on-screen.
The Input Setup menu
Make sure the microphone is connected, and
if you’re using a subwoofer, make sure it is
switched on and set to a comfortable volume
level.
You only need to make settings in the
Input Setup menu if you didn’t hook up your
digital equipment according to the default
settings (see Input function default and possible
settings on page 27 ). In this case, you need to
tell the receiver what equipment is hooked up
to which terminal so the buttons on the remote
control correspond to the components you’ve
connected.
6
Wait for the test tones to finish, then
confirm the speaker configuration in the
GUI screen.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while
the receiver outputs test tones to determine
the speakers present in your setup. Try to be as
quiet as possible while it’s doing this.
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds
while the speaker configuration check screen
is being displayed, the Full Auto MCACC Setup
will resume automatically. In this case, you
don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in
step 7.
! With error messages (such as Too much
ambient noise! or Check microphone.),
select RETRY after checking for ambient
noise (see Problems when using the Auto
MCACC Setup on page 26 ) and verifying the
mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be
a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT
and continue.
1
Press
on the remote control,
then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and
ENTER to navigate through the screens and
select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the
current menu.
— If the connections were wrong, turn off
the power, disconnect the power cord,
then reconnect properly. After this,
perform the Full Auto MCACC procedure
again.
Problems when using the Auto
MCACC Setup
2
Select ‘System Setup’ from the
If the room environment is not optimal for the
Auto MCACC Setup (too much background
noise, echo off the walls, obstacles blocking
the speakers from the microphone) the final
settings may be incorrect. Check for household
appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.),
that may be affecting the environment and
switch them off if necessary. If there are any
instructions showing in the front panel display,
please follow them.
Home Menu.
— If the connections were right, select
GO NEXT and continue.
3
Select ‘Input Setup’ from the
System Setup menu.
7
Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press
ENTER.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while
the receiver outputs more test tones to deter-
mine the optimum receiver settings.
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is
happening. It may take 3 to 10 minutes.
4.System Setup
A/V RECEIVER
a.Manual SP Setup
b. Input Setup
c. OSD Language
d. Network Setup
e. HDMI Setup
1a.Full Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
f. Other Set
4b.Input Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Now Analyzing...
2/9
OK
Input
Input Name
Input Skip
:
:
:
DVD
Rename
OFF
Environment Check
Ambient Noise
Microphone
! Some older TVs may interfere with the
operation of the microphone. If this seems to
be happening, switch off the TV when doing
the Auto MCACC Setup.
Digital In
:
:
:
:
:
COAX-1
:
:
:
Exit
HDMI Input
Component In
12V Trigger1
12V Trigger2
DVD
In-1
OFF
OFF
8
The Full Auto MCACC Setup procedure
is completed and the Home Menu menu
reappears automatically.
Speaker YES/NO
1a.Full Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
L
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
YES
YES
FHL
Exit
C
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Exit
Finish
FHR
R
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from
this receiver upon completion of the Full Auto
MCACC Setup.
The settings made in the Full Auto MCACC
Setup should give you excellent surround
sound from your system, but it is also possible
to adjust these settings manually using The
Advanced MCACC menu on page 59 or The
System Setup and Other Setup menus on page
65 .
SR
SBR
SBL
SL
4
Select the input function that you
SW
10
want to set up.
OK
RETRY
The default names correspond with the names
next to the terminals on the rear panel (such as
DVD or BD) which, in turn, correspond with the
names on the remote control.
Exit
Cancel
The configuration shown on-screen should
reflect the actual speakers you have.
! If you see an ERR message (or the speaker
configuration displayed isn’t correct),
En
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
04
Basic Setup
5
Select the input(s) to which you’ve
Input Terminals
Input
function
Input function default and
possible settings
Operation Mode Setup
connected your component.
Digital
HDMI Component
For example, if your DVD player only has an
optical output, you will need to change the DVD
input function’s Digital In setting from COAX-1
(default) to the optical input you’ve connected
it to. The numbering (OPT-1 to OPT-2) corre-
sponds with the numbers beside the inputs on
the back of the receiver.
This receiver is equipped with a great number
of functions and settings. The Operation Mode
feature is provided for users who find it difficult
to master all these functions and settings.
One of two settings can be selected for the
Operation Mode: Expert and Basic.
TUNER
The terminals on the receiver generally cor-
respond to the name of one of the input func-
tions. If you have connected components to
this receiver differently from (or in addition to)
the defaults below, see The Input Setup menu
on page 26 to tell the receiver how you’ve
connected up. The dots (k) indicate possible
assignments.
ADAPTER
PORT
SIRIUS
k
a
With Control with HDMI set to ON, assignments
cannot be made (see Control with HDMI function on
1
Press
on the remote control,
page 44 ).
VSX-51 only
VSX-50 only
6
When you’re finished, proceed to the
then press HOME MENU.
b
c
settings for other inputs.
There are optional settings in addition to the
assignment of the input jacks:
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and
ENTER to navigate through the screens and
select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the
current menu.
Input Terminals
Input
function
Digital
HDMI Component
! Input Name – You can choose to rename the
input function for easier identification. Select
Rename to do so, or Default to return to the
system default.
! Input Skip – When set to ON, that input
is skipped when selecting the input using
INPUT SELECT. (DVD and other inputs can
be still be selected directly with the input
function buttons.)
DVD
BD
COAX-1
(DVD)
IN 1
(BD)
2
Select ‘Operation Mode Setup’ from
the Home Menu.
Select the Operation Mode setting you
k
<a, b>
TV/SAT
OPT-1
OPT-2
k
IN 2
k
3
(DVR/
BDR)
DVR/BDR
want.
! Expert (default) – Users can set all the
functions by themselves.
VIDEO
<b>
(VIDEO)
! Basic – The number of operable functions is
restricted, and functions whose operations
are restricted are automatically set to achieve
the Pioneer-recommended sound and
picture quality. The functions that can be
operated are shown below. They can be set
as necessary by referring to the operating
instructions.
! 12V Trigger1/2 – After connecting a
component to one of the 12 volt triggers (see
Switching components on and off using the
12 volt trigger on page 23 ), select MAIN,
ZONE 2 or OFF for the corresponding trigger
setting to switch it on automatically along
with the (main or sub) zone specified.
VIDEO 1
<c>
(VIDEO 1)
k
VIDEO 2
<c>
HDMI 1
<b>
IN 1
HDMI 2
<b>
(HDMI 2)
7
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the System Setup menu.
Operable
functions/ Descriptions
items
HOME
MEDIA
GALLERY
Page
iPod/USB
HOME MENU
COAX-2
<b>
Full Auto
MCACC
Makes high precision
sound field settings easily.
CD
25
26
26
CD-R/TAPE
k
Input names can be
Input Name changed as desired for
easier use.
Inputs not being used are
Input Skip
skipped (not displayed).
En
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
04
Basic Setup
Operable
Operable
functions/ Descriptions
items
Page
functions/ Descriptions
items
Page
Software
Update
Updates to the latest ver-
sion of the software.
PHASE
CTRL (Phase
Control)
Plays with phase shifting in
the low range corrected.
38
Network
Setup
Checks the receiver’s IP
address.
Switches the input to iPod/
USB and sets the mode
allowing operation from
the iPod.
iPod iPhone
iPad DIRECT
CONTROL
Pairing
Bluetooth
Setup
Pairs with a Bluetooth
device using AS-BT100 or
AS-BT200.
30
34
Audio Parameters
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
MCACC
(MCACC
preset)
You will return to the Home Menu.
Selects your favorite
MCACC preset memory.
47
47
DELAY
(Sound
Delay)
Adjusts the delay time of
the overall sound.
S.RTRV
(Auto Sound
Retriever)
Plays compressed sound
with high sound quality.
47
47
47
DUAL
(Dual Mono) setting.
Dual monaural audio
V.SB
(Virtual Sur-
Creates a virtual surround
back channel sound for
round Back) playback.
V.HEIGHT
(Virtual
Height)
Creates a virtual height
channel sound for play-
back.
47
Other functions
INPUT
SELECT
(INPUT
SELECTOR)
Switches the input.
29
29
MASTER
VOLUME
+/–, MUTE
Use to set the listening
volume.
Only Pioneer-recom-
mended modes can be
selected.
LISTENING
MODE
36
45
Plays using the PQLS
function.
PQLS
En
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
05
Basic playback
resolutions that may not be converted. In this
case, use an analog video connection.
1
Press u RECEIVER to switch on the
Basic playback
receiver and your TV.
See Connecting an iPod on page 22 .
! It is also possible to operate the iPod on the
iPod itself, without using the TV screen. For
details, see Switching the iPod controls on
page 30 .
! See also Listening to your system on page 36
for information on different ways of listening
to sources.
It is possible to check on the front panel dis-
play whether or not multi-channel playback is
being performed properly. For details, see Auto
Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different
input signal formats on page 82 .
When using a surround back speaker,
2D+PLIIx MOVIE is displayed when playing
Dolby Digital signals, and DTS+Neo:6 is dis-
played when playing DTS 5.1-channel signals.
If the display does not correspond to the input
signal and listening mode, check the connec-
tions and settings.
Playing an iPod
Playing a source
Here are the basic instructions for playing a
source (such as a DVD disc) with your home
theater system.
This receiver has the iPod iPhone iPad USB
terminal that will allow you to control playback
of audio content from your iPod using the con-
trols of this receiver.
! This receiver is compatible with the audio
and video of the iPod nano (audio only for the
iPod nano 1G/2G), iPod fifth generation (audio
only), iPod classic, iPod touch and iPhone.
However, some of the functions may be
restricted for some models. The receiver is not
compatible with the iPod shuffle.
! This receiver has been developed and tested
for the software version of iPod/iPhone/iPad
indicated on the website of Pioneer
(http://pioneer.jp/homeav/support/ios/na/).
! Installing software versions other than
indicated on the website of Pioneer to your
iPod/iPhone/iPad may result in incompatibility
with this receiver.
2
Press iPod USB on the remote control
to switch the receiver to the iPod/USB.
Loading appears in the GUI screen while the
receiver verifies the connection and retrieves
data from the iPod.
When the display shows the iPod Top menu
you’re ready to play music from the iPod.
! The controls of your iPod will be inoperable
when connected to this receiver.
1
Switch on your system components
and receiver.
Start by switching on the playback compo-
nent (for example a DVD player), your TV and
subwoofer (if you have one), then the receiver
(press u RECEIVER).
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this
receiver.
2
Select the input function you want to
Playing back audio files stored on
an iPod
To navigate songs on your iPod, you can take
advantage of the GUI screen of your TV con-
nected to this receiver. You can also control all
operations for music in the front panel display
of this receiver.
! Note that characters that cannot be displayed
on this receiver are displayed as #.
! This feature is not available for photos on your
iPod. To display photos, switch iPod operation
to the iPod (see Switching the iPod controls on
page 30 ).
play.
5
Use the MASTER VOLUME +/– to adjust
You can use the input function buttons on the
remote control, INPUT SELECT, or the front
panel INPUT SELECTOR dial.
! If you need to manually switch the input
signal type press SIGNAL SEL (page 37).
the volume level.
Turn down the volume of your TV so that all
sound is coming from the speakers connected
to this receiver.
! iPod and iPhone are licensed for reproduction
of non-copyrighted materials or materials the
user is legally permitted to reproduce.
! Features such as the equalizer cannot
be controlled using this receiver, and we
recommend switching the equalizer off before
connecting.
3
Press
mode.
Press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT
to the receiver operation
Playing a source with HDMI
connection
4
(AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to
select ‘AUTO SURROUND’ and start
playback of the source.
%
Use INPUT SELECT to select the input
function connected to the receiver’s HDMI
input terminals.
If you’re playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround
sound source, you should hear surround sound.
If you are playing a stereo source, you will only
hear sound from the front left/right speakers in
the default listening mode.
! You may need to check the digital audio
output settings on your DVD player or digital
satellite receiver. It should be set to output
Dolby Digital, DTS and 88.2 kHz / 96 kHz PCM
(2 channel) audio, and if there is an MPEG
audio option, set this to convert the MPEG
audio to PCM.
You can also perform the same operation by
using the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front
panel or by pressing HDMI on the remote con-
trol repeatedly.
! Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio
options on page 47 to THROUGH if you want
to hear HDMI audio output from your TV (no
sound will be heard from this receiver).
! If the video signal does not appear on your
TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on
your component or display. Note that some
components (such as video game units) have
! Pioneer cannot under any circumstances
accept responsibility for any direct or indirect
loss arising from any inconvenience or loss
of recorded material resulting from the iPod
failure.
! When listening to a track on the iPod in the
main zone, it is possible to control the sub
zone, but not to listen to a different track in
the sub zone from the one playing in the main
zone.
Finding what you want to play
When your iPod is connected to this receiver,
you can browse songs stored on your iPod by
playlist, artist name, album name, song name,
genre or composer, similar to using your iPod
directly.
1
Use i/j to select ‘Music’ from the
iPod Top menu.
En
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
05
Basic playback
PGM MEMORY MENU
DVD
AUDIO
VIDEO
1
Press iPod CTRL to switch the iPod
2
Use i/j to select a category, then
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
HDD
LIST TUNE TOOLS
controls.
press ENTER to browse that category.
! To return to the previous level any time, press
RETURN.
Note
PHASE CTRL
STATUS
TOP MENU
BAND
T.EDIT
GUIDE
This enables operation and display on your
iPod, and this receiver’s remote control and GUI
screen become inactive.
If an Over Current message lights in the dis-
play, the power requirements of the USB device
are too high for this receiver. Try following the
points below:
! Switch the receiver off, then on again.
! Reconnect the USB device with the receiver
switched off.
! Use a dedicated AC adapter (supplied with the
device) for USB power.
If this doesn’t remedy the problem, it is likely
your USB device is incompatible.
TV
/
DTV
MPX
PQLS
PRESET
ENTER
TUNE
PRESET
S.RETRIEVER
1
AUDIO
3
Use i/j to browse the selected
2
3
CATEGORY
RETURN
SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP
INFO
DISP
2
Press iPod CTRL again to switch back to
HOME
MENU
iPod CTRL
category (e.g., albums).
! Use k/l to move to previous/next levels.
4
5
6
the receiver controls.
4
Continue browsing until you arrive at
what you want to play, then press d to
start playback.
Note
Playing back photo files stored on
a USB memory device
! Photo files cannot be played in the sub zone.
! Change the receiver’s input to the
iPod in one action by pressing the
iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT CONTROL button
on the front panel to enable iPod operations
on the iPod.
Note
1
Use i/j to select ‘Photos’ from the
USB Top menu.
Use i/j to select a folder, then press
ENTER to browse that folder.
! To return to the previous level any time, press
RETURN.
! You can play all of the songs in a particular
category by selecting the All item at the top of
each category list. For example, you can play
all the songs by a particular artist.
Playing back audio files stored on
a USB memory device
The maximum number of levels that you can
select in Step 2 (below) is 8. Also, you can dis-
play and play back up to 30 000 folders and files
within a USB memory device.
2
Playing a USB device
It is possible to play files using the USB inter-
face on the front of this receiver.
Basic playback controls
3
Continue browsing until you arrive at
what you want to play, then press d to
start playback.
This receiver’s remote control buttons can be
used for basic playback of files stored on an
iPod.
! Press iPod USB to switch the remote control
to the iPod/USB operation mode.
! Compatible USB devices include external
magnetic hard drives, portable flash memory
drives (particularly key drives) and digital audio
players (MP3 players) of format FAT16/32.
! Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility
(operation and/or bus power) with all USB
mass storage devices and assumes no
responsibility for any loss of data that may
occur when connected to this receiver.
! Note that non-Roman characters in the playlist
are displayed as #.
The selected content is displayed in full screen
1
Use i/j to select ‘Music’ from the
USB Top menu.
Use i/j to select a folder, then press
ENTER to browse that folder.
! To return to the previous level any time, press
RETURN.
and a slideshow starts.
After a slideshow launches, pressing ENTER
toggles between play and pause (only when
Theme on the Slideshow Setup is set to
Normal (OFF)).
! If the slideshow is left in the pause mode for
five minutes, the list screen reappears.
PGM MEMORY MENU
DVD
AUDIO
VIDEO
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
HDD
2
LIST TUNE TOOLS
PHASE CTRL
STATUS
AUDIO
TOP MENU
BAND
T.EDIT
GUIDE
TV
/
DTV
MPX
PQLS
PRESET
ENTER
TUNE
PRESET
S.RETRIEVER
1
2
3
CATEGORY
RETURN
1
Press u RECEIVER to switch on the
3
Continue browsing until you arrive at
what you want to play, then press d to
start playback.
! Copyrighted audio files cannot be played
back on this receiver.
! DRM-protected audio files cannot be played
back on this receiver.
SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP
INFO
DISP
HOME
MENU
iPod CTRL
receiver and your TV.
4
5
6
See Connecting a USB device on page 22 .
! Make sure the receiver is in standby when
disconnecting the USB device.
Basic playback controls
! During Audiobook playback, press i/j to
switch the playback speed: Faster f Normal
f Slower.
Button(s)
What it does
Starts displaying a photo and play-
ing a slideshow.
2
Press iPod USB on the remote control
ENTER, d
to switch the receiver to the iPod/USB.
Loading appears in the GUI screen as this
receiver starts recognizing the USB device con-
nected. When the display shows the USB Top
menu you’re ready to play from the USB device.
Switching the iPod controls
Stops the player and returns to the
previous menu.
RETURN, k
You can switch over the iPod controls between
the iPod and the receiver.
! You cannot use this function, when an
iPod of fifth generation or iPod nano of first
generation is connected.
Basic playback controls
o
Displays the previous photo content.
Displays the next photo content.
This receiver’s remote control buttons can be
used for basic playback of files stored on USB
memory devices.
! Press iPod USB to switch the remote control
to the iPod/USB operation mode.
<a>
p
<a>
En
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
05
Basic playback
Button(s)
What it does
About playable file formats
The USB function of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some file formats
are not available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats.
e
<a>
Pauses/unpauses the slideshow.
DISP
<a>
Displays the photo information.
Music files
a
You can only use this button when Theme on the
Slideshow Setup is set to Normal (OFF).
Category
Extension
Stream
Sampling frequency
Quantization bitrate
Channel
8 kHz to 48 kHz
16 bit
Slideshow Setup
MP3
<a>
MPEG-1, 2, 2.5 Audio
Layer-3
Make the various settings for playing slide-
shows of photo files here.
.mp3
2 ch
Bitrate
8 kbps to 320 kbps
Supported/Supported
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
8 bit, 16 bit
1
Use i/j to select ‘Slideshow Setup’
VBR/CBR
from the USB Top menu.
Sampling frequency
Quantization bitrate
Channel
2
Select the setting you want.
! Theme – Add various effects to the
slideshow.
WAV
.wav
LPCM
2 ch, Monaural
8 kHz to 48 kHz
16 bit
Sampling frequency
Quantization bitrate
Channel
! Interval – Set the interval for switching the
photos. This may not be available depending
on the Theme setting.
! BGM – Play music files stored on the USB
device while displaying photos.
! Music Select – Select the folder containing
the music files to be played when BGM is set
to ON.
WMA8/9
<b>
WMA
.wma
2 ch
Bitrate
8 kbps to 320 kbps
Supported/Supported
VBR/CBR
a
b
“MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.”
Files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not sup-
ported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice.
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the USB Top menu.
Photo files
Category Extension
Meeting the following conditions:
.jpg
.jpeg
.jpe
.jif
!
Baseline JPEG format (including files recorded in Exif/DCF
Format
format)
JPEG
!
Y:Cb:Cr - 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0
.jfif
Resolution
30 to 8184 pixels vertical, 40 to 8184 pixels horizontal
En
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
05
Basic playback
! While listening to FM radio, press
AUTO/ALC/DIRECT for Neural Surround.
! The Neural Surround mode can be selected
also with STANDARD.
4
Press ENTER.
Listening to the radio
Listening to Satellite Radio
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and
number stop blinking and the receiver stores
the station.
The following steps show you how to tune in to
FM and AM radio broadcasts using the auto-
matic (search) and manual (step) tuning func-
tions. If you already know the frequency of the
station you want, see Tuning directly to a sta-
tion below. Once you are tuned to a station you
can memorize the frequency for recall later-see
Saving station presets on page 32 for more on
how to do this.
To listen to Satellite Radio, you’ll need to con-
nect a SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner (sold sepa-
rately) to your Sirius-Ready receiver. SIRIUS
Satellite Radio is available to residents of the
US (except Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.
Satellite Radio delivers a variety of commercial-
free music from categories ranging from Pop,
Rock, Country, R&B, Dance, Jazz, Classical
and many more plus coverage of all the top
professional and college sports including play
by play games from select leagues and teams.
Additional programming includes expert sports
talk, uncensored entertainment, comedy, fam-
ily programming, local traffic and weather and
news from your most trusted sources.
Once you’ve purchased a SIRIUS tuner you’ll
need to activate it and subscribe to begin
enjoying the service. Easy to follow installation
and setup instructions are provided with the
SIRIUS tuner. There are a variety of program-
ming packages available, including the option
of adding “The Best of XM” programming to the
SIRIUS service. The “Best of XM” service is not
available to SIRIUS Canada subscribers at this
time. Please check with SIRIUS Canada for any
updates using the numbers and web address
below.
Family friendly packages are also available to
restrict channels featuring content that may be
inappropriate for children.
To subscribe to SIRIUS, U.S. and Canadian
customers can call 1-888-539-SIRI (1-888-539-
7474) or visit sirius.com (US) or siriuscanada.
ca (Canada).
SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos
are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its
subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Service not
available in Alaska and Hawaii.
Tuning directly to a station
Listening to station presets
1
2
Press TUNER to select the tuner.
1
2
Press TUNER to select the tuner.
Use BAND to change the band (FM or
Press CLASS to select the class in which
AM), if necessary.
the station is stored.
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to
G.
3
4
Press D.ACCESS (Direct Access).
1
2
Press TUNER to select the tuner.
Use the number buttons to enter the
3
Press PRESET k/l to select the
Use BAND to change the band (FM or
frequency of the radio station.
For example, to tune to 106.00 (FM), press 1, 0,
6, 0, 0.
If you make a mistake halfway through, press
D.ACCESS twice to cancel the frequency and
start over.
station preset you want.
! You can also use the number buttons on the
remote control to recall the station preset.
AM), if necessary.
3
Tune to a station.
There are three ways to do this:
! Automatic tuning – To search for stations
in the currently selected band, press and
hold TUNE i/j for about a second. The
receiver will start searching for the next
station, stopping when it has found one.
Repeat to search for other stations.
! Manual tuning – To change the frequency
one step at a time, press TUNE i/j.
! High speed tuning – Press and hold TUNE
i/j for high speed tuning. Release the
button at the frequency you want.
Naming station presets
For easier identification, you can name your
station presets.
Saving station presets
If you often listen to a particular radio station,
it’s convenient to have the receiver store the
frequency for easy recall whenever you want
to listen to that station. This saves the effort of
manually tuning in each time. This receiver can
memorize up to 63 stations, stored in seven
banks, or classes (A to G) of 9 stations each.
1
Choose the station preset you want to
name.
See Listening to station presets on page 32 for
how to do this.
2
Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT).
The display shows PRESET NAME, then a blink-
ing cursor at the first character position.
1
Tune to a station you want to
3
Input the name you want.
Improving FM sound
memorize.
See Listening to the radio on page 32 for more
on this.
Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the
position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.
If the TUNED or STEREO indicator doesn’t
light when tuning to an FM station because the
signal is weak, press MPX to switch the receiver
into mono reception mode. This should improve
the sound quality and allow you to enjoy the
broadcast.
2
Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT).
Note
The display shows PRESET MEMORY, then a
blinking memory class.
! To erase a station name, simply repeat steps 1
to 3 and input eight spaces instead of a name.
! Once you have named a station preset, you
can press DISP when listening to a station
to switch the display between name and
frequency.
3
Press CLASS to select one of the seven
classes, then press PRESET k/l to select
the station preset you want.
You can also use the number buttons to select a
Using Neural Surround
This feature uses Neural SurroundTM technolo-
gies to achieve optimal surround sound from
FM radio.
station preset.
En
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
05
Basic playback
however, use just the front panel display to do
everything if you prefer.
! Parental Lock – Use i/j and ENTER to
select channels you would like to place under
parental lock. Channels put under parental
lock are not displayed in the Channel Guide,
but may be accessed by directly inputting
their channel number and providing the
parental lock password.
! Antenna Aiming – Check the strength of
satellite and terrestrial reception.
! Memory Recall – Use i/j to browse your
saved song information.
3
Press CLASS to select one of the seven
%
input.
Press SIRIUS to switch to the SIRIUS
classes, then press k/l to select the
channel preset you want.
You can also use the number buttons to select a
For best reception, you may need to move the
SiriusConnectTM tuner antenna near a window
(refer to the manual for the SiriusConnectTM
Home tuner for antenna placement
recommendations).
! If after pressing SIRIUS the display shows
Antenna Error, try disconnecting the antenna
and reconnecting. If the display shows
Check Sirius Tuner, check the connection
of the AC adapter and this receiver to the
SiriusConnectTM tuner.
Selecting channels and browsing by
genre
station preset.
From the SIRIUS Channel Guide, you can
browse SIRIUS Radio channels in the order that
they appear, or you can narrow your channel
search by genre.
4
Press ENTER.
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and
number stop blinking and the receiver stores
the SIRIUS channel.
%
Press i/j to enter the SIRIUS
Channel Guide, then navigate through
the channels one at time with i/j, then
press ENTER to listen to the SIRIUS radio
broadcast.
! To browse by genre, first press CATEGORY,
use i/j to select a genre, then press ENTER.
! To cancel and exit any time, press RETURN.
Note
! Password Set – Set the parental lock
password.
! You can also press MEMORY during
reception display to save the information of up
to five songs. See Using the SIRIUS Menu on
page 33 to recall this information.
! You can reset the Channel presets, Memory,
Channel Skip/Add, Parental Lock and
Password settings in Resetting the system on
page 51 .
! You can check the strength of reception in
Using the SIRIUS Menu on page 33 .
3
When you’re finished press TOP MENU
to return to the reception display.
Note
! In order to activate your radio subscription,
you will need the SIRIUS ID (SID) which
uniquely identifies your tuner. The SID may be
found on a sticker located on the packaging,
or on the bottom of the tuner itself. The label
will have a printed 12-digit SID number. When
you have located the SID, write it down in the
space provided near the end of this manual.
Contact SIRIUS on the internet at:
Note
! You can select channels directly by pressing
D.ACCESS, then the three-digit channel
number.
! You can press DISP to change SIRIUS Radio
information in the front panel display.
! The currently selected channel is
automatically chosen (without pressing
ENTER) after 10 seconds.
Listening to channel presets
1
Press CLASS to select the class in which
the channel is stored.
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to
G.
2
Press k/l to select the channel preset
! Follow the prompts to activate your
subscription, or you can also call SIRIUS toll-
free at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474).
! Select 0 (SIRIUS ID) from the GUI screen to
check the Radio ID of the SIRIUS Connect
tuner (see Selecting channels and browsing by
genre on page 33 ).
you want.
You can also use the number buttons on the
remote control to recall the channel preset.
Saving channel presets
This receiver can memorize up to 63 channels,
stored in seven banks, or classes (A to G) of 9
channels each.
Using the SIRIUS Menu
The SIRIUS Menu provides additional SIRIUS
Radio features.
1
Select the channel you want to
memorize.
See Selecting channels and browsing by genre
on page 33 .
1
2
Press TOP MENU.
Listening to SIRIUS Radio
Use i/j to select a menu item, then
After connecting, you will be able to use this
receiver to select channels and navigate cat-
egories using the GUI screen.
! It’s easiest if you have your TV switched on to
take advantage of the GUI screens. You can,
press ENTER.
2
Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT).
The display shows a blinking memory class.
Choose from the following menu items:
! Channel Skip/Add – Use i/j and ENTER
to select channels you would like to remove/
restore from/to the channel guide.
En
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
05
Basic playback
be enjoyed on devices equipped with SCMS-T
type Bluetooth wireless technology.
! When using the AS-BT200 only: This unit
complies with Bluetooth Specifications
Ver. 2.1. When this unit and another device
equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology
both comply with Bluetooth Specification Ver.
2.1, pairing of the two may be possible without
the need for inputting a password.
In this case, a passcode may be displayed on
this receiver and on the device equipped with
Bluetooth wireless technology. If this happens,
check that the same passcode is displayed
on this receiver and the device equipped
with Bluetooth wireless technology, then
select YES with the k and l keys and press
ENTER. After this, also perform the connection
operation on the Bluetooth device to be
connected. If the passcode does not match
the code displayed on the Bluetooth device to
be connected, select NO to cancel pairing,
then try starting over.
Press ADPT to set the ADAPTER PORT
input, then conduct the pairing operation on
the Bluetooth wireless technology device.
If pairing is successful, there is no need to
performing the pairing operation below.
! Pair one unit at a time.
! When connecting this receiver by Bluetooth
connections with a device equipped with the
Bluetooth function to listen to music, do not
connect any devices other than this receiver
by Bluetooth connection to the Bluetooth-
equipped device. If a Bluetooth connection is
already established with a device other than
this receiver, disconnect the other device
before connecting this receiver.
5
Select the ‘Passcode’ setting you want.
Bluetooth ADAPTER for
Wireless Enjoyment of Music
Select the same passcode as the Bluetooth
wireless technology device you wish to connect.
! 0000/1234/8888 – Select the passcode from
these options. These are the passcodes that
can be used in most cases.
Remote control operation
Device not
The remote control supplied with this unit
allows you to play and stop media, and perform
other operations.
! It must be necessary that the Bluetooth
wireless technology enabled device supports
AVRCP profiles.
! Remote control operations cannot be
guaranteed for all Bluetooth wireless
technology enabled devices.
equipped with
Bluetooth wireless
technology:
! Others – Select to use a passcode other than
those mentioned above.
Digital music
Bluetooth wireless
technology
player
+
Bluetooth
wireless
6
If you selected ‘Others’ in step 5, enter
enabled device:
Digital music
player
Bluetooth audio
transmitter
(sold commercially)
technology
enabled device:
cell phone
the passcode.
Use i/j to select a number and k/l to move
the cursor.
7
Follow the instructions displayed on
the GUI screen to conduct pairing with the
Bluetooth wireless technology device.
Switch on the Bluetooth wireless technology
device that you want to make pair, place it near
the receiver and set it to the pairing mode.
Pairing the Bluetooth ADAPTER
and Bluetooth wireless
technology device
Bluetooth®
ADAPTER
Music data
This receiver
“Pairing” must be done before you start play-
back of Bluetooth wireless technology content
using the Bluetooth ADAPTER. Make sure to
perform pairing the first time you operate the
system or any time pairing data is cleared.
The pairing step is necessary to register the
Bluetooth wireless technology device to enable
Bluetooth communications. For more details,
see also the operating instructions of your
Bluetooth wireless technology device.
! Pairing is required when you first use the
Bluetooth wireless technology device and
Bluetooth ADAPTER.
! To enable Bluetooth communication, pairing
should be done with both your system and
Bluetooth wireless technology device.
! If the Bluetooth wireless technology device’s
security code is “0000”, there is no need to
make the security code setting on the receiver.
Press ADPT to set the ADAPTER PORT
input, then conduct the pairing operation on
the Bluetooth wireless technology device.
If pairing is successful, there is no need to
performing the pairing operation below.
8
Check to see that the Bluetooth
ADAPTER is detected by the Bluetooth
wireless technology device.
When the Bluetooth wireless technology device
ADVANCED
MCACC
F
L
O
F
F
HDMI
iPod iPhone iPad
SPEAKERS
CONTROL
–
MULTI-ZONE
–
ON/OFF
BAND
TUNER EDIT
TUNE
PRESET
ENTER
AUTO SURR
/
ALC
/
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
iPod iPhone iPad
DIRECT CONTROL
STREAM DIRECT
STEREO
INPUT
SELECTOR
MASTER
VOLUME
STANDBY/ON
PHONES
PUSH
OPEN
is connected:
CONNECTED appears in the receiver display.
! The system can display alphanumeric
characters only. Other characters may not be
displayed correctly.
When the Bluetooth wireless technology device
is not connected:
Go back to the passcode setting in step 5. In
this case, perform the connection operation
from the Bluetooth wireless technology device.
Remote control
operation
Wireless music play
When the Bluetooth ADAPTER (AS-BT100 or
AS-BT200) is connected to this unit, a product
equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology
(portable cell phone, digital music player, etc.)
can be used to listen to music wirelessly. Also,
by using a commercially available transmit-
ter supporting Bluetooth wireless technol-
ogy, you can listen to music on a device not
equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology.
The AS-BT100 and AS-BT200 models supports
SCMS-T contents protection, so music can also
9
From the Bluetooth wireless
technology device list, select Bluetooth
ADAPTER and enter the Passcode selected
in step 5.
! The passcode may in some cases be referred
to as PASSKEY or PIN code.
1
Press
then press HOME MENU.
Select ‘System Setup’, then press
ENTER.
on the remote control,
2
3
4
Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER.
Select ‘Pairing Bluetooth Device’, then
press ENTER.
En
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
05
Basic playback
Listening to music contents of a
Bluetooth wireless technology
device with your system
1
Press ADPT on the remote control to
switch the receiver to ADAPTER PORT
input.
! When the Bluetooth ADAPTER is not plugged
into the ADAPTER PORT, NO ADAPTER
will be displayed if ADAPTER PORT input is
selected.
2
From the Bluetooth wireless
technology device, perform the operation
to connect to the Bluetooth ADAPTER.
3
Start playback of music contents stored
on the Bluetooth wireless technology
device.
This receiver’s remote control buttons can
be used for basic playback of files stored on
Bluetooth wireless technology devices.
! Bluetooth wireless technology device should
be compatible with AVRCP profile.
! Depending on the Bluetooth wireless
technology device you use, operation may
differ from what is shown in the remote
control buttons.
PGM MEMORY MENU
HDD
DVD
PHASE CTRL
STATUS
TV
/
DTV
MPX
2
PQLS
3
S.RETRIEVER
1
AUDIO
4
While listening to a source, set the
remote control to the receiver operation
mode, then press ADV SURR repeatedly to
select SOUND RETRIEVER AIR.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are reg-
istered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and any use of such marks by PIONEER
CORPORATION is under license. Other trade-
marks and trade names are those of their
respective owners.
En
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
06
Listening to your system
! 2 PRO LOGIC – 4.1 channel surround sound
(sound from the surround speakers is mono)
! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT – Up to 7.1 channel
sound (front height)
! WIDE SURROUND MOVIE – Up to 7.1
channel sound (front wide), especially suited
to movie sources
! WIDE SURROUND MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel
sound (front wide), especially suited to music
sources
! Neo:6 CINEMA – 7.1 channel sound
(surround back), especially suited to movie
sources
! Neo:6 MUSIC – 7.1 channel sound (surround
back), especially suited to music sources
! Neural Surround – Up to 7.1 channel sound
(surround back), especially suited to music
sources
! STEREO – The audio is heard with your sound
settings and you can still use the audio
options.
With multichannel sources, if you have con-
nected surround back, front height or front wide
speakers, you can select (according to format):
! 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – See above
! 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – See above
! Dolby Digital EX – Creates surround back
channel sound for 5.1 channel sources and
provides pure decoding for 6.1 channel
sources (like Dolby Digital Surround EX)
! DTS-ES – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel
playback with DTS-ES encoded sources
! DTS Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel
playback with DTS encoded sources
! Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel
playback
Listening to your system
Note
! When listening sources in
be optimal for the volume level. This mode is
2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT mode, you can also
adjust the H.GAIN effect (see Setting the Audio
options on page 47 ).
! When listening to 2-channel sources in
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode, there are
three further parameters you can adjust:
C.WIDTH,DIMENSION and PANORAMA. See
Setting the Audio options on page 47 to adjust
them.
! When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6
Cinema or Neo:6 Music mode, you can also
adjust the center image effect (see Setting the
Audio options on page 47 ).
! Neural Surround can be selected for
2-channel signals for which the input signal
is PCM (48 kHz or less), Dolby Digital, DTS or
analog 2-channel sources.
Important
particularly optimum when listening at night.
! The listening modes and many features
described in this section may not be available
depending on the current source, settings and
status of the receiver.
Note
! When ALC is selected, the effect level can
be adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in
Setting the Audio options on page 47 .
Auto playback
There are many ways to listen back to sources
using this receiver, but the simplest, most
direct listening option is the Auto Surround
feature. The receiver automatically detects what
kind of source you’re playing and selects multi-
channel or stereo playback as necessary.
Listening in surround sound
Using this receiver, you can listen to any source
in surround sound. However, the options avail-
able will depend on your speaker setup and the
type of source you’re listening to.
%
While listening to a source,
Standard surround sound
The following modes provide basic surround
sound for stereo and multichannel sources.
press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT
(AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) for
auto playback of a source.
! The stereo mode can also be selected by
pressing the STEREO button.
! When listening through headphones, you can
select STEREO mode only.
AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the dis-
play before showing the decoding or playback
format. Check the digital format indicators in
the front panel display to see how the source is
being processed.
! If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby
Surround encoded, the proper decoding
format will automatically be selected and
shows in the display.
! When listening to the FM radio, the Neural
Surround feature is selected automatically
(see Using Neural Surround on page 32 for
more on this).
! When listening to the ADAPTER PORT
input, the SOUND RETRIEVER AIR feature is
selected automatically.
%
While listening to a source, press
STANDARD (STANDARD SURROUND).
If necessary, press repeatedly to select a listen-
ing mode.
! If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby
Surround encoded, the proper decoding
format will automatically be selected and
shows in the display.
! If the surround back speakers are not
connected, 2 Pro Logic IIx becomes
2 Pro Logic II (5.1 channel sound).
With two channel sources, you can select from:
! 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – Up to 7.1 channel
sound (surround back), especially suited to
movie sources
! 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel
sound (surround back), especially suited to
music sources
Using the Advanced surround
effects
The Advanced surround effects can be used for
a variety of additional surround sound effects.
Most Advanced Surround modes are designed
to be used with film soundtracks, but some
modes are also suited for music sources. Try
different settings with various soundtracks to
see which you like.
%
Press ADV SURR
(ADVANCED SURROUND) repeatedly to
select a listening mode.
! ACTION – Designed for action movies with
dynamic soundtracks
! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT – See above
! WIDE SURROUND MOVIE – See above
! WIDE SURROUND MUSIC – See above
! STEREO – See above
! Straight Decode – Plays back without the
effects above.
ALC – In the Auto level control (ALC) mode, this
receiver equalizes playback sound levels.
Also, the low and high frequency sounds, dia-
logs, surround effects, etc., that are difficult to
hear when the volume is low are adjusted to
! 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME – Up to 7.1 channel
sound (surround back), especially suited to
video games
! DRAMA – Designed for movies with lots of
dialog
En
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
06
Listening to your system
! SCI-FI – Designed for science fiction with lots
of special effects
! MONO FILM – Creates surround sound from
mono soundtracks
! ENT.SHOW – Suitable for musical sources
! EXPANDED – Creates an extra wide stereo
field
! TV SURROUND – Provides surround sound
for both mono and stereo TV sources
! ADVANCED GAME – Suitable for video
games
! SPORTS – Suitable for sports programs
! CLASSICAL – Gives a large concert hall-type
sound
! ROCK/POP – Creates a live concert sound for
rock and/or pop music
! PHONES SURR – When listening through
headphones, you can still get the effect of
overall surround.
to PURE DIRECT. With DIRECT, the only
modifications added to PURE DIRECT
playback are calibration of the sound field by
the MCACC system and the Phase Control
effect.
! PURE DIRECT – Plays back unmodified
sound from source with only minimal digital
treatment. No sound is output from the
Speaker B in this mode.
Choosing the input signal
On this receiver, it is possible to switch
the input signals for the different inputs as
described below.
! This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital,
PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz) and DTS (including
DTS 96/24) digital signal formats. The
compatible signals via the HDMI terminals
are: Dolby Digital, DTS, PCM (32 kHz to 192
kHz), Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-
EXPRESS, DTS-HD Master Audio and SACD.
! You may get digital noise when an LD, CD,
DVD or BD player compatible with DTS is
playing an analog signal. To prevent noise,
make the proper digital connections (page 15)
and set the signal input to DIGITAL.
Note
! When an Advanced Surround listening mode
is selected, the effect level can be adjusted
using the EFFECT parameter in Setting the
Audio options on page 47 .
However, with F.S.SURR FOCUS,
F.S.SURR WIDE and SOUND RETRIEVER AIR,
the effect level cannot be adjusted.
! The Front Stage Surround Advance
(F.S.SURR FOCUS and F.S.SURR WIDE)
function allows you to create natural surround
sound effects using just the front speakers
and the subwoofer.
Note
! When listening through headphones, you can
select ALC or PURE DIRECT mode only.
Selecting MCACC presets
! Default setting: MEMORY 1
! UNPLUGGED – Suitable for acoustic music
sources
! Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals.
For more details, refer to the instruction
manual supplied with your DVD player.
If you have calibrated your system for different
listening positions, you can switch between set-
tings to suit the kind of source you’re listening
to and where you’re sitting (for example, watch-
ing movies from a sofa, or playing a video game
close to the TV).
! EXT.STEREO – Gives multichannel sound to a
stereo source, using all of your speakers
! F.S.SURR FOCUS – Use to provide a rich
surround sound effect directed to the center of
where the front left and right speakers sound
projection area converges.
! F.S.SURR WIDE – Use to provide a surround
sound effect to a wider area than FOCUS
mode.
Using Stream Direct
1
Press
mode.
Press SIGNAL SEL to select the input
to the receiver operation
Use the Stream Direct modes when you want
to hear the truest possible reproduction of a
source. All unnecessary signal processing is
bypassed, and you’re left with the pure analog
or digital sound source.
Processing differs depending on the input sig-
nal and whether or not surround back speakers
are connected. For details, see Auto Surround,
ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal
formats on page 82 .
2
signal corresponding to the source
component.
Each press cycles through the options as
1
Press
mode.
While listening to a source, press
to the receiver operation
2
follows:
MCACC.
FOCUS position
WIDE position
! AUTO – The receiver selects the first
available signal in the following order: HDMI;
DIGITAL; ANALOG.
! ANALOG – Selects an analog signal.
! DIGITAL – Selects an optical or coaxial
digital signal.
! HDMI – Selects an HDMI signal.
— When the HDMI audio output parameter
is set to THROUGH, the sound will be
heard through your TV, not from this
receiver.
When set to DIGITAL, HDMI or AUTO (only
selected DIGITAL or HDMI), the indicators light
according to the signal being decoded (see
Display on page 9 ).
(Recommended)
Press repeatedly to select one of the six MCACC
presets. See Data Management on page 64 to
check and manage your current settings.
! These settings have no effect when
headphones are connected.
Front left
speaker
Front right
speaker
Front left
speaker
Front right
speaker
%
While listening to a source,
press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT
(AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to
select the mode you want.
Check the digital format indicators in the front
panel display to see how the source is being
processed.
! AUTO SURROUND – See Auto playback on
page 36 .
! ALC – Listening in Auto level control mode
(page 36).
! You can also press k/l to select the
MCACC preset.
! SOUND RETRIEVER AIR – Suitable for
listening to the sound from a Bluetooth
wireless technology device. The
SOUND RETRIEVER AIR listening mode can
only selected when the ADAPTER PORT input
or listening through headphones.
! DIRECT – Plays back sound from the
source with the least modification next
En
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
06
Listening to your system
your subwoofer, set the cutoff frequency to a
higher value.
! If the speaker distance is not properly set, you
may not have a maximized PHASE CONTROL
effect.
! The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to
ON in the following cases:
—When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched
on.
Better sound using Phase
Control
This receiver’s Phase Control feature uses
phase correction measures to make sure your
sound source arrives at the listening position in
phase, preventing unwanted distortion and/or
coloring of the sound.
Phase Control technology provides coherent
sound reproduction through the use of phase
matching for an optimal sound image. The
default setting is on and we recommend leav-
ing Phase Control switched on for all sound
sources.
—When the HDMI audio output parameter is
set to THROUGH in Setting the Setting the
Audio options on page 47 .
1
Press
mode.
Press PHASE CTRL (PHASE CONTROL) to
to the receiver operation
2
switch on phase correction.
The PHASE CONTROL indicator on the front
panel lights.
Note
! Phase matching is a very important factor
in achieving proper sound reproduction.
If two waveforms are ‘in phase’, they crest
and trough together, resulting in increased
amplitude, clarity and presence of the sound
signal. If a crest of a wave meets a trough,
then the sound will be ‘out of phase’ and an
unreliable sound image will be produced.
! The PHASE CONTROL feature is available
even when the headphones are plugged in.
! If your subwoofer has a phase control switch,
set it to the plus (+) sign (or 0º). However,
the effect you can actually feel when
PHASE CONTROL is set to ON on this receiver
depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set
your subwoofer to maximize the effect. It is
also recommended you try changing the
orientation or the place of your subwoofer.
! Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your
subwoofer to off. If this cannot be done on
En
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
07
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs
DMC to play files are called DMRs (Digital
Playback with HOME MEDIA
GALLERY inputs
Media Renderers). This receiver supports this
DMR function. When in the DMR mode, such
operations as playing and stopping files can
be performed from the external controller.
Volume adjustment and the muting control
are also possible. The DMR mode is canceled
if the remote control unit is operated while in
the DMR mode (aside from certain buttons,
including the MASTER VOLUME +/–, MUTE
and DISP).
! Depending on the external controller being
used, playback may be interrupted when the
volume is adjusted from the controller. In this
case, adjust the volume from the receiver or
remote control.
Note
! A network environment is required to use
AirPlay.
! The receiver’s name that shows up in the
AirPlay UI on iPod touch, iPhone, iPad and
iTunes can be changed by Friendly Name
from Network Setup.
! AirPlay provided on this receiver has been
developed and tested based on the software
versions for the iPod, iPhone, iPad and the
software versions for iTunes that are indicated
on the Pioneer website. AirPlay may not be
compatible with iPod, iPhone, iPad or iTunes
software versions other than those indicated
on the Pioneer website.
! Besides a PC, you can also play back audio
Enjoying the Home Media
Gallery
files stored on your other components with
the built-in media server function based
on DLNA 1.0 or DLNA 1.5 framework and
protocols (i.e. network-capable hard disks
and audio systems).
2
Listening to Internet radio stations
You can select and listen to your favorite
Internet radio station from the list of Internet
radio stations created, edited, and managed by
the vTuner database service exclusively for use
with the Pioneer products.
dSee Playback with Home Media Gallery on
page 40 and Listening to Internet radio stations
on page 40 .
This receiver’s Home Media Gallery function
allows you to listen to audio files or listen to
Internet radio stations on a computer or other
component connected to the receiver’s LAN
terminal. This chapter describes the setup and
playback procedures required to enjoy these
features. It is advisory that you also refer to the
operation manual supplied with your network
component.
Using AirPlay on iPod touch,
iPhone, iPad and iTunes
About the DHCP server function
To play back audio files stored on components
on the network or listen to Internet radio sta-
tions, you must turn on the DHCP server func-
tion of your router. In case your router does
not have the built-in DHCP server function, it
is necessary to set up the network manually.
Otherwise, you cannot play back audio files
stored on components on the network or listen
to Internet radio stations. See Network Setup
menu on page 67 for more on this.
This receiver supports AirPlay audio streaming
from iPod touch (2nd, 3rd and 4th generations),
iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPad with iOS 4.2 or later,
and iTunes 10.1 (Mac and PC) or later.
To use AirPlay, select your receiver on your iPod
touch, iPhone, iPad or in iTunes. *1
The receiver’s input will switch automatically to
Home Media Gallery when AirPlay is in use. *2
The following operations can be performed
when in AirPlay mode:
! Adjustment of the receiver’s volume from iPod
touch, iPhone, iPad or iTunes.
! Pause/resume, next/previous track, and
shuffle/repeat from the remote control of the
receiver.
! Display of the currently playing track
information on the receiver’s display,
including artist, song and album name.
*1: For more information, see the Apple web-
site (http://www.apple.com).
*2: The receiver’s power automatically turns on
when Network Standby at Network Setup is
set to ON.
! To listen to Internet radio stations, you must
sign a contract with an ISP (Internet Service
Provider) beforehand.
Introduction
! Photo or video files cannot be played back.
! With Windows Media Player 11 or Windows
Media Player 12, you can even play back
copyrighted audio files on this receiver.
About playable DLNA network
devices
The Home Media Gallery allows you to play
music on media servers connected on an identi-
cal Local Area Network (LAN) as the receiver.
This unit allows for the playing of files stored on
the following:
! PCs running Microsoft Windows Vista or XP
with Windows Media Player 11 installed
! PCs running Microsoft Windows 7 with
Windows Media Player 12 installed
Authorizing this receiver
In order to be able to play with Home Media
Gallery, this receiver must be authorized. This
happens automatically when the receiver
makes a connection over the network to the PC.
If not, please authorize this receiver manually
on the PC. The authorization (or permission)
method for access varies depending on the type
of server currently being connected. For more
information on authorizing this receiver, refer to
the instruction manual of your server.
Features of Home Media
Gallery
This receiver is equipped with the LAN terminal
and you can enjoy the following features by con-
necting your components to these terminals.
! DLNA-compatible digital media servers (on
PCs or other components)
Files stored in a PC or DMS (Digital Media
Server) as described above can be played
via command from an external Digital Media
Controller (DMC). Devices controlled by this
1
Playback the music files stored in PCs
You can playback a lot of musics stored in your
PCs using this unit.
dSee Playback with Home Media Gallery on
page 40 and Playing back audio files stored on
components on the network on page 40 .
En
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
07
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs
! Favorites – Favorite songs currently being
registered
Saving and retrieving Internet radio
stations
AUDIO
VIDEO
PGM MEMORY MENU
DVD
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
HDD
Playback with Home Media
Gallery
LIST TUNE TOOLS
PHASE CTRL
STATUS
TOP MENU
BAND
T.EDIT
GUIDE
! Recently played – Internet Radio listening
history (most recent 20 incidents)
Depending on the selected category, the names
of folders, files, and Internet radio stations are
displayed.
You can easily save and retrieve saved Internet
radio stations. See Advanced operations for
Internet radio on page 41 for more on this.
! To listen to Internet radio stations, you must
have high-speed broadband Internet access.
With a 56 K or ISDN modem, you may not
enjoy the full benefits of Internet radio.
! The port number varies depending on the
Internet radio station. Check the firewall
settings.
! A list of Internet radio stations provided by the
vTuner database service is subject to change
or deletion without notice due to various
reasons.
! Broadcasts may be stopped or interrupted
depending on the Internet radio station. In
this case, you cannot listen to a radio station
selected from the list of Internet radio stations.
TV
/
DTV
MPX
PQLS
PRESET
ENTER
TUNE
PRESET
S.RETRIEVER
1
AUDIO
2
3
CATEGORY
RETURN
Important
! When you play back audio files,
HOME
MENU
iPod CTRL
SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP
INFO
DISP
4
5
6
‘Connecting...’ is displayed before playback
starts. The display may continue for several
seconds depending on the type of file.
! In case a domain is configured in a Windows
network environment, you cannot access a PC
on the network while you are logged onto the
domain. Instead of logging onto the domain,
log onto the local machine.
3
Use i/j to select the folder, music
files or Internet radio station to play back,
and then press ENTER.
Listening to Internet radio
stations
Press i/j to scroll up and down the list and
select the desired item. When you press ENTER,
playback starts with the playback screen being
displayed for the selected item. To return to the
list screen, press RETURN.
When the list screen is displayed from the
playback screen, the playback screen reappears
automatically if no operation is performed for 10
seconds while the list screen is displayed.
Only audio files with the mark can be played.
In case of the folders with the mark, use i/j
and ENTER to select the desired folder and
audio files.
Internet radio is an audio broadcasting service
transmitted via the Internet. There are a large
number of Internet radio stations broadcast-
ing a variety of services from every corner of
the world. Some are hosted, managed, and
broadcast by private individuals while others
are by the corresponding traditional terrestrial
radio stations or radio networks. Whereas ter-
restrial, or OTA (over-the-air), radio stations are
geographically restricted on the range of radio
waves broadcast from a transmitter through
the air, Internet radio stations are accessible
from anywhere in the world, as long as there is
a connection to the Internet, as services are not
transmitted through the air but are delivered
over the World Wide Web. On this receiver you
can select Internet radio stations by genre as
well as by region.
! There are cases where the time elapsed may
not be correctly displayed.
1
Press HMG to select Home Media
Gallery as the input function.
It may take several seconds for this receiver
to access the network. The following screen
appears when the Home Media Gallery is
selected as the input function. The number next
to indicates the number of connected servers.
Registering broadcast stations not
on the vTuner list from the special
Pioneer site
4
Repeat step 3 to play back the desired
song.
Top Menu
A/V RECEIVER
With the receiver, broadcast stations not
included on the list of station distributed by
vTuner can be registered and played. Check the
access code required for registration on the
receiver, use this access code to access the
special Pioneer Internet radio site and register
the desired broadcast stations in your favorites.
The address of the special Pioneer Internet
radio site is:
1
For detailed operating instructions, refer to the
section shown below.
! Internet radio stations – See Listening to
Internet radio stations on page 40 .
! Server – See Playing back audio files stored on
components on the network on page 40 .
Internet Radio
******
Favorites
Recently Played
Setup
1/5
Depending on the Internet line conditions,
the sound may not be smooth when playing
Internet radio.
! The server without the mark cannot be
accessed.
Playing back audio files stored on
components on the network
About list of Internet radio
The list of Internet radio stations on this receiver
is created, edited, and managed by the vTuner
database service exclusively for use with this
receiver. For details about vTuner, see vTuner
on page 84 .
1
Display the Internet Radio list screen.
2
Use i/j to select the category you
You can perform the following operations with
the remote control of this receiver. Note that
some buttons are not available for operation
depending on the category currently being
played back.
To display the Internet Radio list screen, per-
form steps 1 to 3 at Playback with Home Media
Gallery on page 40 .
want to play back, and then press ENTER.
Select a category from the following list:
! Internet Radio – Internet radio
! Server Name – Server components on the
network
2
Use i/j to select ‘Help’, then press
! Press HMG to switch the remote control to the
HOME MEDIA GALLERY operation mode.
ENTER.
En
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
07
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs
copyrights. This device uses WMDRM software
3
Use i/j to select ‘Get access code’,
Registering and deleting audio files
and Internet radio stations in and
from the Favorites folder
Retrieving saved Internet radio
stations
to access WMDRM protected content. If the
WMDRM software fails to protect the content,
content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke
the software’s ability to use WMDRM to play or
copy protected content. Revocation does not
affect unprotected content. When you download
licenses for protected content, you agree that
Microsoft may include a revocation list with the
licenses. Content owners may require you to
upgrade WMDRM to access their content. If you
decline an upgrade, you will not be able to access
content that requires the upgrade.
then press ENTER.
The access code required for registration on the
special Pioneer Internet radio site is displayed.
Make a memo of this address.
The following can be checked on the Help
screen:
! Get access code – The access code required
for registration on the special Pioneer
Internet radio site is displayed.
! Show Your WebID/PW – After registering
on the special Pioneer Internet radio site, the
registered ID and password are displayed.
! Reset Your WebID/PW – Resets all the
information registered on the special
Pioneer Internet radio site. When reset, all
the registered broadcast stations are also
cleared. If you want to listen to the same
stations, re-register after resetting.
You need to save Internet radio stations first
before retrieving them. If there are no Internet
radio stations currently being saved, see Saving
Internet radio stations on page 41 and save at
least one Internet radio station before proceed-
ing with the following steps.
Press PGM while a song is being played back or
stopped. The selected song is then registered in
the Favorites folder.
Up to 20 songs or Internet radio stations can be
registered.
To delete a registered song, select the Favorites
folder, select the song you want to delete from
the folder, and press CLR. The selected song is
then deleted from the Favorites folder.
1
Select the class that you want to
retrieve an Internet radio station from.
Each time you press CLASS, the class switches
to A to G in turn.
This product is protected by certain intellectual
property rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of
such technology outside of this product is pro-
hibited without a license from Microsoft.
2
Use i/j to select the station number
Advanced operations for
Internet radio
that you want to retrieve.
You can also select the station number by using
the number buttons.
‘Preset Not Stored’ appears when you select
an Internet radio station currently not being
saved.
DLNA
Saving Internet radio stations
4
Access the special Pioneer Internet
This receiver can remember the Internet radio
stations that you often listen to in seven classes
(A to G) with up to nine stations in each class
to make the total of 63 stations at its maximum
capacity.
radio site from your computer and
perform the registration process.
Access the above site and use the access code
in step 3 to perform user registration, following
the instructions on the screen.
About network playback
The network playback function of this unit uses
the following technologies:
1
Tune into the Internet radio station
DLNA CERTIFIEDTM Audio Player
that you want to save.
Tune into the desired Internet radio station by
following Steps 1 to 3 on page 40.
The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a
cross-industry organization of consumer elec-
tronics, computing industry and mobile device
companies. Digital Living provides consumers
with easy sharing of digital media through a
wired or wireless network in the home.
The DLNA certification logo makes it easy
to find products that comply with the DLNA
Interoperability Guidelines. This unit complies
with DLNA Interoperability Guidelines v1.5.
When a PC running DLNA server software or
other DLNA compatible device is connected to
this player, some setting changes of software
or other devices may be required. Please refer
to the operating instructions for the software or
device for more information.
5
Register the desired broadcast
Windows Media Player
stations as your favorites, following the
instructions on the computer’s screen.
Both broadcast stations not on the vTuner list
and stations on the vTuner list can be regis-
tered. In this case they are registered on the
receiver as favorite broadcast stations and can
be played.
See Windows Media Player 11/
Windows Media Player 12 on page 84 for more
on this.
2
Press T.EDIT to switch to the station-
saving mode.
3
Press CLASS to select the class that you
want to save the station in.
Select the desired class from A to G.
Windows Media DRM
Microsoft Windows Media Digital Rights
Management (WMDRM) is a platform to pro-
tect and securely deliver content for playback
on computers, portable devices and network
devices. Home Media Gallery functions as a
WMDRM 10 for networked devices. WMDRM
protected content can only be played on media
servers supporting WMDRM.
4
Use i/j to select the number that
you want to save the station as, and then
press ENTER.
You can also select the station number by using
the number buttons. Select the desired number
from 1 to 9.
Playing back your favorite songs
You can register up to 20 of your favorite songs
or Internet radio stations in the Favorites folder.
Note that only the audio files stored on compo-
nents on the network can be registered.
Content owners use WMDRM technology to
protect their intellectual property, including
En
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
07
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs
DLNATM, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIEDTM
are trademarks, service marks, or certification
marks of the Digital Living Network Alliance.
OR DAMAGE ARISING FROM ACCESS
connection between player and PC is
recommended.
! If several clients are playing simultaneously,
as the case may be, playback is interrupted or
stalled.
TO OR USE OF CONTENT. NO ORAL OR
WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN
BY PIONEER OR ITS CUSTOMER SERVICES
REPRESENTATIVES WILL CREATE ANY SUCH
WARRANTY.
IN NO EVENT WILL PIONEER, ITS AFFILIATES,
OR THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS,
DIRECTORS, OR EMPLOYEES BE LIABLE IN
CONNECTION WITH YOUR USE OF THIRD
PARTY CONTENT SERVICES THROUGH
THIS DEVICE FOR PERSONAL INJURY
OR SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES
FOR ATTORNEY’S FEES, LOST DATA OR LOST
PROFITS, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF
LIABILITY AND WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN
NO EVENT WILL PIONEER’S TOTAL LIABILITY
TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES ARISING FROM
THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIRD PARTY
CONTENT SERVICES (OTHER THAN AS MAY
BE REQUIRED BY LAW IN CASES INVOLVING
PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED $10.00. THE
FOREGOING LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF
THE ABOVE REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. IF ANY APPLICABLE AUTHORITY
HOLDS ANY PORTION OF THIS SECTION
TO BE UNENFORCEABLE, THEN LIABILITY
WILL BE LIMITED TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
Content playable over a network
! Even when encoded in a compatible format,
some files may not play correctly.
! Depending on the security software installed
on a connected PC and the setting of such
software, network connection may be blocked.
Pioneer is not responsible for any malfunction
of the player and/or the Home Media Gallery
features due to communication error/malfunc-
tions associated with your network connection
and/or your PC, or other connected equip-
ment. Please contact your PC manufacturer or
Internet service provider.
! Movie or Photo files cannot be played back.
! There are cases where you cannot listen to an
Internet radio station even if the station can be
selected from a list of radio stations.
! Some functions may not be supported
depending on the server type or version used.
! Supported file formats vary by server. As such,
files not supported by your server are not
displayed on this unit. For more information
check with the manufacturer of your server.
“Windows MediaTM” is a trademark of Microsoft
Corporation.
This product includes technology owned by
Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or
distributed without a license from Microsoft
Licensing, Inc.
Disclaimer for Third Party Content
ACCESS TO THIRD PARTY CONTENT
Microsoft®, Windows®7, Windows®Vista,
Windows®XP, Windows®2000,
SERVICES, INCLUDING ALL ASSOCIATED
FEATURES AND FUNCTIONALITIES, IS
PROVIDED “AS IS,” “AS AVAILABLE” AND
AT THE USER’S OWN RISK, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. PIONEER
Windows®Millennium Edition, Windows®98, and
WindowsNT® are either registered trademarks
or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, IN CONNECTION WITH ACCESS
TO AND USE OF CONTENT SERVICES
THROUGH THIS DEVICE, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. PIONEER
DOES NOT GUARANTEE, REPRESENT, OR
WARRANT THAT CONTENT SERVICES WILL
BE FREE FROM ERRORS, INTERRUPTION,
LOSS, CORRUPTION, ATTACK, VIRUSES,
INTERFERENCE, HACKING, OR OTHER
SECURITY INTRUSION, AND PIONEER
DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY IN CONNECTION
WITH THE FOREGOING. PIONEER IS NOT
LIABLE OR RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS
About playback behavior over a
network
! Playback may stall when the PC is switched
off or any media files stored on it are deleted
while playing content.
! If there are problems within the network
environment (heavy network traffic, etc.)
content may not be displayed or played
properly (playback may be interrupted or
stalled). For best performance, a 100BASE-TX
En
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
07
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs
Category Extension Stream
About playable file formats
Sampling frequency
Quantization bitrate
Channel
32 kHz to 48 kHz
The Home Media Gallery feature of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some
file formats are not available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats. Also, the
compatibility of file formats varies depending on the type of server. Check with your server to ensure
the compatibility of file formats supported by your server.
.m4a
16 bit
MPEG-4 AAC LC
MPEG-4 HE AAC
(aacPlus v1/2)
.aac
.3gp
.3g2
AAC
2 ch
Bitrate
16 kbps to 320 kbps
VBR/CBR
Supported/Supported
! Internet radio playback may be affected by the Internet communications environment, and in this
case playback may not be possible even with the file formats listed here.
Sampling frequency
Quantization bitrate
Channel
8 kHz to 96 kHz
8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit
Music files
FLAC
.flac
FLAC
2 ch
—
Bitrate
Category Extension Stream
VBR/CBR
—
Sampling frequency
Quantization bitrate
Channel
8 kHz to 48 kHz
16 bit
a
b
“MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.”
Only streaming data from servers is concerned, so there is no extension.
MP3
<a>
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer-3
.mp3
2 ch
Bitrate
8 kbps to 320 kbps
Supported/Supported
8 kHz to 48 kHz
16 bit, 20 bit, 24 bit
2 ch
VBR/CBR
Sampling frequency
Quantization bitrate
Channel
—
<b>
LPCM
WAV
LPCM
LPCM
In case of VSX-51
8 kHz to 192 kHz
In case of VSX-50
8 kHz to 96 kHz
Sampling frequency
.wav
Quantization bitrate
Channel
16 bit, 20 bit, 24 bit
2 ch
Sampling frequency
Quantization bitrate
Channel
8 kHz to 48 kHz
16 bit
WMA2/7/8
2 ch
Bitrate
5 kbps to 320 kbps
Supported/Supported
8 kHz to 48 kHz
16 bit
VBR/CBR
WMA
.wma
Sampling frequency
Quantization bitrate
Channel
WMA9
2 ch
Bitrate
5 kbps to 320 kbps
Supported/Supported
VBR/CBR
En
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
08
Control with HDMI function
Control with HDMI feature, see Control with
HDMI function on page 44 .
! To get the most out of this function, we
recommend that you connect your HDMI
component not to a TV but rather directly to
the HDMI terminal on this receiver.
5
Select the ‘Control Mode’ setting you
Control with HDMI function
want.
Choose whether you want to enable HDMI for
all linked functions or the PQLS function only.
However, Display Power Off will activate the
settings set forth in step 6 below.
! ALL – Enabled for all linked functions.
! PQLS – Enabled only for the PQLS function.
When PQLS is selected, link functions
other than the PQLS function may not work
properly. If you wish to use all link functions,
select ALL.
! For details about concrete operations,
settings, etc., refer to also the operating
instructions for each component.
About the Control with HDMI
function
Synchronized operations below with a Control
with HDMI-compatible Pioneer TV or Blu-ray
Disc player or with a component of another
make that supports the Control with HDMI
functions are possible when the component is
connected to the receiver using an HDMI cable.
! The receiver’s volume can be set and the
sound can be muted using the TV’s remote
control.
! The receiver’s input switches over
automatically when the TV’s input is
changed or a Control with HDMI-compatible
component is played.
HDMI Setup
Making Control with HDMI
connections
You can use synchronized operation for a con-
nected TV and up to six (VSX-51)/four (VSX-50)
other components.
! Be sure to connect the TV’s audio cable to
the audio input of this unit. When the TV and
receiver are connected by HDMI connections,
if the TV supports the HDMI ARC (Audio
Return Channel) function, the sound of the
TV is input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT
terminal, so there is no need to connect an
audio cable. In this case, set TV Audio at
HDMI Setup to via HDMI (see HDMI Setup on
page 44 ).
You must adjust the settings of this receiver
as well as the connected Control with HDMI-
compatible components in order to make use
of the Control with HDMI function. For more
information see the operating instructions for
each component.
6
Select the ‘Display Power Off’ setting
you want.
If the TV’s power is turned off while using the
Control with HDMI function, the receiver’s
power is also turned off (all power off function).
This function can be disabled.
! YES – The all power off function is enabled.
The receiver’s power turns off together with
the TV’s power. This function only works
when the input for a component connected
to the receiver by HDMI connection is
selected or when watching the TV.
1
Press
then press HOME MENU.
Select ‘System Setup’, then press
ENTER.
on the remote control,
2
! The receiver’s power is also set to standby,
when the TV’s power is set to standby.
3
4
Select ‘HDMI Setup’, then press ENTER.
Select the ‘Control’ setting you want.
Choose whether to set this unit’s Control with
HDMI function ON or OFF. You will need to set
it to ON to use the Control with HDMI function.
When using a component that does not sup-
port the Control with HDMI function, set this
to OFF.
! ON – Enables the Control with HDMI
function. When this unit’s power is turned
off and you have a supported source begin
playback while using the Control with HDMI
function, the audio and video outputs from
the HDMI connection are output from the TV.
! OFF – The Control with HDMI is disabled.
Synchronized operations cannot be used.
When this unit’s power is turned off, audio
and video of sources connected via HDMI are
not output.
Important
For details, see Connecting your TV and playback
components on page 17 .
! With Pioneer devices, the Control with HDMI
functions are referred to as “KURO LINK”.
! You cannot use this function with components
that do not support Control with HDMI.
! We only guarantee this receiver will work
with Pioneer Control with HDMI-compatible
components and components of other
makes that support the Control with HDMI
function. However, we do not guarantee that
all synchronized operations will work with
components of other makes that support the
Control with HDMI function.
! NO – The all power off function is disabled.
The receiver’s power is not affected when the
TV’s power is turned off.
Important
7
Select the ‘Standby Through’ setting
! When connecting this system or changing
connections, be sure to switch the power off
and disconnect the power cord from the wall
socket. After completing all connections,
connect the power cords to the wall socket.
! After this receiver is connected to an AC
outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI
initialization process begins. You cannot carry
out any operations during this process. The
HDMI indicator in the front panel display
blinks during this process, and you can turn
on this receiver once it has stopped blinking.
When you set the Control with HDMI to OFF,
you can skip this process. For details about the
you want.
It is possible to transfer signals from an HDMI-
connected player to the TV when this receiver’s
power is on standby as long as Control is ON,
but the amount of energy consumed rises. It is,
however, possible to minimize energy consump-
tion when power is set to standby.
! Normal – Regular setting. Power-up time
from standby is short.
! Use a High Speed HDMI® cable when you
want to use the Control with HDMI function.
The Control with HDMI function may not work
properly if a different type of HDMI cable is
used.
! Eco – Conserves energy while standby.
Power-up time is longer than when set to
Normal.
En
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
08
Control with HDMI function
through this receiver, and the receiver will
switch to the synchronized amp mode.
! When in the synchronized amp mode, you
can adjust the receiver’s volume or mute the
sound using the TV’s remote control.
! When in the synchronized amp mode, the
synchronized amp mode is canceled when
the receiver’s power is turned off. To turn the
synchronized amp mode back on, set audio to
be played through the receiver from the TV’s
menu screen, etc. This receiver will power up
and switch to the synchronized amp mode.
! When the synchronized amp mode is
canceled, the receiver’s power turns off if you
were viewing an HDMI input or a TV program
on the TV.
! When in the synchronized amp mode, the
synchronized amp mode is canceled if an
operation that produces sound from the TV is
performed from the TV’s menu screen, etc.
! When the TV’s power is set to standby, the
receiver’s power is also set to standby. (Only
when the input for a component connected to
the receiver by HDMI connection is selected or
when watching the TV.)
! The receiver’s input switches automatically
when the Control with HDMI-compatible
component is played.
! The receiver’s input switches automatically
when the TV’s input is switched.
! The synchronized amp mode remains in
effect even if the receiver’s input is switched
to a component other than one connected by
HDMI.
The operations below can also be used on
Pioneer Control with HDMI-compatible TVs.
! When the receiver’s volume is adjusted or the
sound is muted, the volume status is displayed
on the TV’s screen.
8
Select the ‘TV Audio’ setting you want.
About connections with a product
of a different brand that supports
the Control with HDMI function
The synchronized operations below can be used
when the receiver’s Control with HDMI func-
tion is connected to a TV of a brand other than
Pioneer that supports the Control with HDMI
function. (Depending on the TV, however, some
of the Control with HDMI functions may not
work.)
! When the TV’s power is set to standby, the
receiver’s power is also set to standby. (Only
when the input for a component connected to
the receiver by HDMI connection is selected or
when watching the TV)
! The sound of TV programs or an external
input connected to the TV can also be output
from the speakers connected to the receiver.
(If the TV does not support the HDMI ARC
(Audio Return Channel) function, this requires
connection of an optical digital cable, etc., in
addition to the HDMI cable.)
The synchronized operations below can be
used when the receiver’s Control with HDMI
function is connected to a player or recorder of
a brand other than Pioneer that supports the
Control with HDMI function.
! When playback starts on the player or
recorder, the receiver’s input switches to
the HDMI input to which that component is
connected.
See the Pioneer website for the latest informa-
tion on the models of non-Pioneer brands and
products that support the Control with HDMI
function.
Setting the PQLS function
When a TV supporting the HDMI ARC (Audio
Return Channel) function is connected to the
receiver, the sound of the TV can be input via
the HDMI OUT terminal.
! Normal – The TV’s sound is input from the
Audio input terminals other than HDMI
inputs.
! via HDMI – The TV’s sound is input via the
HDMI terminal. This can only be selected
when Control is set to ON.
PQLS (Precision Quartz Lock System) is a
digital audio signal transfer control technology
using the Control with HDMI function. It offers
higher-quality audio playback by controlling
audio signals from the receiver to a PQLS com-
patible player, etc. This enables removing jitter
that has a negative effect on the quality of the
sound and is generated upon transmission.
! On players compatible with PQLS Bit-stream,
PQLS always works for all sources.
! On players compatible with PQLS Multi
Surround, PQLS works for all sources. Set the
player’s audio output to Linear PCM.
! On players compatible with PQLS 2 ch Audio,
PQLS only works when playing CDs.
Please refer to the operating instructions sup-
plied with your player for more information.
This function is activated when Control is set
to ON.
! If a listening mode other than
AUTO SURROUND, ALC, DIRECT,
PURE DIRECT or STEREO is selected while
the PQLS effect is enabled, the PQLS effect is
disabled.
9
When you’re finished, press
HOME MENU.
Before using synchronization
Once you have finished all connections and
settings, you must:
1
2
Put all components into standby mode.
Turn the power on for all components,
with the power for the TV being turned on
last.
3
Choose the HDMI input to which the
TV is connected to this receiver, and see if
video output from connected components
displays properly on the screen or not.
! When this receiver is connected by HDMI
cable to a Pioneer player that is compatible
with the PQLS function via HDMI connection
and HDMI reauthentication is performed
(the HDMI indicator blinks), the PQLS effect
is enabled and the listening mode is set to
AUTO SURROUND if a listening mode other
than AUTO SURROUND, ALC, DIRECT,
PURE DIRECT or STEREO is selected.
4
Check whether the components
connected to all HDMI inputs are properly
displayed.
About synchronized
operations
The Control with HDMI-compatible component
connected to the receiver operates in sync as
described below.
%
Press
on the remote control,
then press PQLS to select the PQLS setting.
The setting is displayed on the front panel
display.
! From the menu screen of the Control with
HDMI-compatible TV, set audio to be played
! When the OSD language is switched on
the TV, the receiver’s language setting also
switches accordingly.
En
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
08
Control with HDMI function
! PQLS AUTO – PQLS is enabled. A precision
quartz controller in this receiver eliminates
distortion caused by timing errors (jitter),
giving you the best possible digital-to-analog
conversion when you use the HDMI interface.
This is valid as an HDMI function for PQLS-
compatible players.
! PQLS OFF – PQLS is disabled.
Cautions on the Control with
HDMI function
! Connect the TV directly to this receiver.
Interrupting a direct connection with other
amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI
switch) can cause operational errors.
! Only connect components (Blu-ray Disc
player, etc.) you intend to use as a source to
the HDMI input of this receiver. Interrupting
a direct connection with other amps or an
AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can
cause operational errors.
! When Control is set to ON, HDMI Input
in The Input Setup menu on page 26 is
automatically set to OFF.
! When the receiver’s Control is turned ON,
even if the receiver’s power is in the standby
mode, it is possible to output the audio and
video signals from a player via HDMI to
the TV without producing sound from the
receiver, but only when a Control with HDMI-
compatible component (Blu-ray Disc player,
etc.) and compatible TV are connected. In this
case, the receiver’s power turns on and the
power and HDMI indicators light.
En
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
09
Using other functions
Setting
What it does
Option(s)
Using other functions
Applies the treble and bass tone controls to a source, BYPASS
or bypasses them completely.
This setting is only displayed when the listening mode
is STEREO, Auto surround (STEREO) or SOUND
RETRIEVER AIR.
TONE
(Tone Control)
ON
Setting the Audio options
There are a number of additional sound settings you can make using the AUDIO PARAMETER
menu. The defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold.
BASS
<a>
c –6 to +6 (dB) d
Default: 0 (dB)
Adjusts the amount of bass.
Adjusts the amount of treble.
TREBLE
<a>
c –6 to +6 (dB) d
Default: 0 (dB)
Important
! Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to the
current source, settings and status of the receiver.
With the Auto Sound Retriever function, DSP process- OFF
ing is used to compensate for the loss of audio data
upon compression, improving the sound’s sense of
density and modulation.
1
2
Press
to the receiver operation mode, then press AUDIO PARAMETER.
S.RTRV
Use i/j to select the setting you want to adjust.
(Auto Sound Retriever) When ON is selected, the Sound Retriever effect is
<b>
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver, certain options may not be able to be
ON
optimized based on the bitrate information of the
contents input to the USB memory audio and HOME
MEDIA GALLERY (digital audio input only) to achieve
high sound quality.
selected. Check the table below for notes on this.
3
Use k/l to set as necessary.
See the table below for the options available for each setting.
Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.
May improve the quality of sound in a noisy source (for OFF
4
DNR
example, video tape with lots of background noise)
when switched on.
This only has an effect with 2-channel signal inputs.
(Digital Noise Reduc-
tion)
ON
Audio parameter menu
Localizes dialog in the center channel to make it stand
out from other background sounds in a TV or movie
DIALOG E
c OFF/FLAT/UP1/UP2/UP3/
UP4 d
UP3 up to UP4, you can make the sound source seem Default: OFF
Setting
What it does
Option(s)
(Dialog Enhancement) soundtrack. By moving from UP1 through UP2 and
<c>
Selects your favorite MCACC preset memory when
multiple preset memories are saved. When an MCACC
preset memory has been renamed, the given name is
displayed.
c M1. MEMORY 1 to M6.
MEMORY 6 d
Default: M1. MEMORY 1
MCACC
(MCACC preset)
to relocate upwards.
CH1 – Channel 1 is heard only
Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital
soundtracks should be played. Dual mono is not
widely used, but is sometimes necessary when two
languages need to be sent to separate channels.
DUAL
(Dual Mono)
CH2 – Channel 2 is heard only
EQ
ON
(Acoustic Calibration
EQ)
Switches on/off the effects of EQ Pro.
CH1 CH2 – Both channels
heard from front speakers
OFF
ON
S-WAVE
(Standing Wave)
This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before
OFF recognizes the PCM signal on a CD, for instance.
When ON is selected, noise may be output during
playback of non-PCM sources. Please select another
input signal if this is a problem.
OFF
Switches on/off the effects of Standing Wave Control.
For discs created with standards other than Phase
OFF
Fixed PCM
ON
Phase C+
(Phase Control Plus)
Control, the LFE channel is delayed upon recording in c 0 to 16 (ms) d
the first place. This function corrects for phase shift-
ing on such discs.
Default: 6ms
Adjusts the level of dynamic range for movie
soundtracks optimized for Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby
Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD and DTS-HD
Master Audio (you may need to use this feature when
listening to surround sound at low volumes).
AUTO
MAX
MID
DRC
Some monitors have a slight delay when showing
video, so the soundtrack will be slightly out of sync
with the picture. By adding a bit of delay, you can
adjust the sound to match the presentation of the
video.
(Dynamic Range
Control)
<d>
c 0.0 to 10.0 (frames) d
1 second = 30 frames (NTSC)
Default: 0.0
DELAY
(Sound Delay)
OFF
En
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
09
Using other functions
Setting
What it does
Option(s)
Setting
What it does
Option(s)
LOW
Some audio sources include ultra-low bass tones.
Set the LFE attenuator as necessary to prevent the
ultra-low bass tones from distorting the sound from
the speakers.
The LFE is not limited when set to 0 dB, which is the
recommended value. When set to –5 dB, –10 dB,
–15 dB or –20 dB, the LFE is limited by the respective
degree. When OFF is selected, no sound is output
from the LFE channel.
Adjusts the output from the front height speaker
when listening in 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT mode.
If set to HIGH, the sound from the top will be more
emphasized.
H.GAIN
(Height Gain)
MID
HIGH
c OFF/ –20dB/ –15dB/ –10dB/
–5dB/ 0dB d
Default: 0dB
LFE
When you’re not using surround back speakers,
selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual sur-
round back channel through your surround speakers.
You can choose to listen to sources with no surround
back channel information.
OFF
(LFE Attenuate)
V.SB
(Virtual Surround
Back)
ON
<j>
0dB
SACD GAIN
<e>
Brings out detail in SACDs by maximizing the dynamic
range (during digital processing).
V.HEIGHT
(Virtual Height)
<k>
When you’re not using front height speakers, select-
ing this mode allows you to hear a virtual front height
channel through your front speakers.
OFF
+6dB
AMP
ON
Specifies the routing of the HDMI audio signal out
of this receiver (amp) or through to a TV. When
THROUGH is selected, no sound is output from this
receiver.
HDMI
(HDMI Audio)
<f>
a
b
The adjustment can be made only when TONE is set to ON.
With the iPod/USB, HOME MEDIA GALLERY or ADAPTER PORT input function, by default S.RTRV is set to
ON.
THROUGH
c
d
e
f
UP1 to UP4 can be selected only when the front height speaker is connected. The presence or absence of
effects depends on the listening mode.
The initially set AUTO is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals. Select MAX or MID for signals other than
Dolby TrueHD.
You shouldn’t have any problems using this with most SACD discs, but if the sound distorts, it is best to switch
the gain setting back to 0dB.
! The HDMI Audio setting cannot be switched while performing synchronized amp mode operations.
! The synchronized amp mode must be turned on in order to play the receiver’s HDMI audio and video input
signals from the TV with the receiver’s power in the standby mode. See About synchronized operations on page
45 .
This feature is only available when the connected display supports the automatic audio/video synchronizing
capability (‘lipsync’) for HDMI. If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set A.DELAY to OFF and
adjust the delay time manually. For more details about the lipsync feature of your display, contact the manufac-
turer directly.
Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music/Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode.
Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 MUSIC/CINEMA mode.
This feature automatically corrects the audio-to-video OFF
delay between components connected with an HDMI
cable. The audio delay time is set depending on the
A.DELAY
(Auto delay)
<g>
operational status of the display connected with an
HDMI cable. The video delay time is automatically
adjusted according to the audio delay time.
ON
C.WIDTH
(Center Width)
(Applicable only
when using a center
speaker)
Provides a better blend of the front speakers by
spreading the center channel between the front right
and left speakers, making it sound wider (higher set-
tings) or narrower (lower settings).
c 0 to 7 d
Default: 3
g
<h>
Adjusts the depth of the surround sound balance from
front to back, making the sound more distant (minus
settings), or more forward (positive settings).
DIMENSION
<h>
c –3 to +3 d
Default: 0
h
i
j
! You can’t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when
any of the stereo, Front Stage Surround Advance, Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected.
! You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the SB setting is set
to NO or if Front Bi-Amp or ZONE 2 is selected at Speaker System. It can also be used when Speaker B is
selected at Speaker System and SP:dA+B ON is selected with the SPEAKERS button.
! You can’t use the Virtual Height mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the
stereo, Front Stage Surround Advance, Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected.
! You can only use the Virtual Height mode if the surround speakers are on and the FH setting is set to NO. It
can also not be used when playing signals containing actual front height channel information.
OFF
PANORAMA
<h>
Extends the front stereo image to include the sur-
round speakers for a ‘wraparound’ effect.
ON
C.IMAGE
(Center Image)
(Applicable only
when using a center
speaker)
Adjusts the center image to create a wider stereo
effect with vocals. Adjust the effect from 0 (all center
channel sent to front right and left speakers) to 10
(center channel sent to the center speaker only).
c 0 to 10 d
Defaults:
Neo:6 MUSIC: 3
Neo:6 CINEMA: 10
k
<i>
c 10 to 90 d
Defaults:
EXT.STEREO: 90
Others: 50
Sets the effect level for the currently selected
Advanced Surround or ALC mode (each mode can be
set separately).
EFFECT
En
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
09
Using other functions
Setting
What it does
Option(s)
Setting the Video options
There are a number of additional picture settings you can make using the VIDEO PARAMETER
menu. The defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold.
PDP
Sets the optimum picture quality for the type of moni-
tor that is connected. Select PDP for plasma displays,
LCD for liquid crystal monitors, FPJ for front projectors,
PRO for professional monitors. If you want to adjust the
picture quality settings to your personal tastes, select
MEMORY.
LCD
V.ADJ
(Advanced Video
Adjust)
FPJ
PRO
Important
MEMORY
! Note that if an option cannot be selected on the VIDEO PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to
the current source, setting and status of the receiver.
! All of the setting items can be set for each input function.
! Setting items other than V.CONV can only be selected when V.CONV is set to ON.
YNR
<d, e>
c 0 to +8 d
Default: 0
Reduces noise in the luminance (Y) signal.
Adjusts how sharp edges appear.
DETAIL
<d, e>
c –4 to +4 d
Default: 0
1
2
Press
to the receiver operation mode, then press VIDEO PARAMETER.
SHARP
(Sharpness)
<d, f>
Adjusts the sharpness of the high-frequency (detailed) c 0 to +8 d
elements in the picture.
Use i/j to select the setting you want to adjust.
Default: 0
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver, certain options may not be able to be
selected. Check the table below for notes on this.
BRIGHT
(Brightness)
<d, f>
c –6 to +6 d
Default: 0
Adjusts the overall brightness.
3
Use k/l to set as necessary.
See the table below for the options available for each setting.
Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.
CONTRAST
<d, f>
c –6 to +6 d
Default: 0
Adjusts the contrast between light and dark.
Adjusts the red/green balance.
4
HUE
<d, f>
c –6 to +6 d
Default: 0
Video parameter menu
CHROMA
(Chroma Level)
<d, f>
c –6 to +6 d
Default: 0
Setting
What it does
Option(s)
Adjusts saturation from dull to bright.
V.CONV
(Digital Video Con-
verter)
ON
Converts video signals for output from the MONITOR
OUT jacks (including HDMI OUT connector) for all
video types (see page 15).
BLK SETUP
(Black Setup)
<g>
Sets the black level according to the video input signal. 7.5
OFF
Normally select 7.5. If the dark parts of the picture are
all black with this setting, select 0.
<a>
0
AUTO
PURE
480p/576p
720p
Specifies the aspect ratio when input signals are
output at the HDMI output. Make your desired settings
while checking each setting on your display (if the
image doesn’t match your monitor type, cropping or
black bands appear).
THROUGH
ASP
(Aspect)
<h>
Specifies the output resolution of the video signal
(when video input signals are output at the HDMI OUT
connector, select this according to the resolution of
your monitor and the images you wish to watch).
RES
(Resolution)
<b>
NORMAL
1080i
a
b
If the video picture deteriorates when this settings is switched ON, switch it OFF.
! When set to a resolution with which the TV (monitor) is not compatible, no picture is output. Also, in some
cases no picture will be output due to copyright protection signals. In this case, change the setting.
! When AUTO is selected, the resolution is selected automatically according to the capacity of the TV (monitor)
connected by HDMI. When PURE is selected, the signals are output with the same resolution as when input
(see About the video converter on page 15 ).
1080p
AUTO
ON
This setting optimizes the operation of the progressive
scanning circuit for playing film materials. Normally
set it to AUTO. If the picture seems unnatural, switch
this to ON or OFF.
PCINEMA
(PureCinema)
<c>
OFF
! If this is set to something other than PURE and 480i/576i analog signals are input, 480p/576p signals are
output from the component output terminals.
! The default is PURE when HDMI input is selected.
P.MOTION
(Progressive Motion)
<c>
Adjusts the motion and still picture quality when video c –4 to +4 d
output is set to progressive.
Default: 0
c
! This setting is valid for component outputs and HDMI output.
! P.MOTION is disabled when PCINEMA is set to ON.
! This setting is only displayed when the video signals below are being input:
— 480i or 576i analog video signals
En
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
09
Using other functions
d
e
Adjustment is not possible unless V.ADJ (Advanced Video Adjust) is set to MEMORY.
! This setting is only displayed when the video signals below are being input:
— 480i or 576i analog video signals
! This setting is only displayed when the video signals below are being input:
— 480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080i analog video signals
— 480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p, 1080p24 HDMI video signals
This adjustment is only possible when 480i signals are being input from the composite video jacks.
! If the image doesn’t match your monitor type, adjust the aspect ratio on the source component or on the
monitor.
terminals. Multichannel sources will not be
heard.
ZONE 2 shows in the display. If this is not
showing, the front panel controls affect the
main zone only.
! SP: A+B ON – Sound is output from the
A-speaker terminals (up to 5 channels,
depending on the source), the two speakers
connected to the B-speaker terminals, and
the subwoofer. The sound from the B-speaker
terminals will be the same as the sound
from the A-speaker terminals (multichannel
sources will be downmixed to 2 channels).
! SP: OFF – No sound is output from the
speakers.
f
3
Use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select
the source for the sub zone.
For example, ZONE 2 CD-R sends the source
connected to the CD-R/TAPE inputs to the sub
room (ZONE 2) .
! If you select TUNER, you can use the tuner
controls to select a preset station (see Saving
station presets on page 32 if you’re unsure
how to do this). The tuner cannot be tuned to
more than one station at a time. Therefore,
changing the station in one zone also
changes the station in the other zone. Please
be careful not to change stations when
recording a radio broadcast.
g
h
! This setting is only displayed when 480i/p or 576i/p video signals are being input.
! SP: FH ON – Front height channels are added
Switching the speaker
terminals
to the front, center and surround channels
(maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7
channels are output.
! SP: OFF – No sound is output from the
speakers.
Note
If you selected Normal(SB/FH),
! The subwoofer output depends on the settings
you made in Manual speaker setup on page 65
. However, if SP: B ON is selected above, no
sound is heard from the subwoofer (the LFE
channel is not downmixed).
! All speaker systems (except
Speaker B connections) are switched off
when headphones are connected.
Normal(SB/FW) or Speaker B at Speaker
system setting on page 65 , you can switch
between speakers using the SPEAKERS button.
If you selected Front Bi-Amp or ZONE 2, the
button will simply switch your main speaker
terminals on or off.
When you select Normal(SB/FW), you can select
from:
4
When Speaker System is set to ZONE 2,
use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust
the volume for the sub zone.
! SP: SB/FW ON – Surround back or front wide
channels are added to the front, center and
surround channels (maximum 5 channels)
and a maximum of 7 channels are output. The
surround back and front wide channels are
switched automatically according to the audio
input signal.
5
When you’re finished, press
MULTI-ZONE CONTROL again to return to
the main zone controls.
%
Use SPEAKERS on the front panel to
select a speaker system setting.
As mentioned above, if you have selected
Front Bi-Amp or ZONE 2, the button will simply
switch your main speaker terminal (A) on or off.
Press repeatedly to choose a speaker terminal
option:
You can also press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on
the front panel to switch off all output to the
sub zone.
! You won’t be able to switch the main zone
off completely unless you’ve switched off the
MULTI-ZONE control first.
! If you don’t plan to use the MULTI-ZONE
feature for a while, turn off the power in both
the sub and main rooms so that this receiver
is in standby.
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls
! SP: SB ON – Surround back channels are
added to the front, center and surround
channels (maximum 5 channels) and a
maximum of 7 channels are output.
! SP: FW ON – Front wide channels are added
to the front, center and surround channels
(maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7
channels are output.
The following steps use the front panel con-
trols to adjust the sub zone volume and select
sources. See MULTI-ZONE remote controls on
page 50 .
When you select Normal(SB/FH), you can select
from:
1
Press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the
front panel.
Each press selects a MULTI-ZONE option:
! ZONE 2 ON – Switches the MULTI-ZONE
feature on
! MULTI ZONE OFF – Switches the MULTI-
ZONE feature off
! SP: SB/FH ON – Surround back or front height
channels are added to the front, center and
surround channels (maximum 5 channels)
and a maximum of 7 channels are output. The
surround back and front height channels are
switched automatically according to the audio
input signal.
! SP: SB ON – Surround back channels are
added to the front, center and surround
channels (maximum 5 channels) and a
maximum of 7 channels are output.
! SP: OFF – No sound is output from the
speakers.
MULTI-ZONE remote controls
Press the remote control’s ZONE 2 to operate
the ZONE 2.
The following table shows the possible MULTI-
ZONE remote controls:
When you select Speaker B, you can select from:
! SP: A ON – Sound is output from the
A-speaker terminals (up to 7 channels
(including surround back channels),
depending on the source).
The MULTI-ZONE indicator lights when the
MULTI-ZONE control has been switched ON.
2
Press MULTI-ZONE CONTROL on the
front panel.
! When the receiver is on, make sure that any
operations for the sub zone are done while
! SP: B ON – Sound is output from the two
speakers connected to the B-speaker
En
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
09
Using other functions
record) to this receiver. For example, you must
connect your recorder using Component video
if your source has also been connected using
Component video.
Button(s) What it does
Using the sleep timer
Checking your system settings
Switches on/off power in the sub
zone.
u
The sleep timer switches the receiver into
standby after a specified amount of time so
you can fall asleep without worrying about the
receiver being left on all night. Use the remote
control to set the sleep timer.
Use the status display screen to check your
current settings for features such as surround
back channel processing and your current
MCACC preset.
INPUT
SELECT
Use to select the input function in the
sub zone.
1
Select the source you want to record.
Use the input function buttons (or
INPUT SELECT).
Use to select the input function
directly (this may not work for some
functions) in the sub zone.
Input func-
tion buttons
1
Press
to the receiver operation
%
Press
to the receiver operation
mode, then press STATUS to check the
system settings.
The front panel display shows each of the fol-
lowing settings for three seconds each: Input
Source d Sampling Frequency d MCACC
preset d ZONE 2 input.
2
Prepare the source you want to record.
MASTER
VOLUME
+/–
mode, then press SLEEP repeatedly to set
the sleep time.
Tune to the radio station, load the CD, video,
DVD etc.
Use to set the listening volume in the
sub zone.
3
Select the input signal according to the
30 min
60 min
<a>
signal to be recorded.
Use the remote control’s SIGNAL SEL button.
Mutes the sound or restores the
sound if it has been muted (adjusting
the volume also restores the sound).
MUTE
<a>
Off
90 min
2
When you’re finished, press STATUS
4
Prepare the recorder.
again to switch off the display.
! You can check the remaining sleep time at
any time by pressing SLEEP once. Pressing
repeatedly will cycle through the sleep options
again.
! The sleep timer is valid for all zones. If
any zone is on, the sleep timer continues
functioning.
Insert a blank tape, MD, video etc. into the
recording device and set the recording levels.
Refer to the instructions that came with the
recorder if you are unsure how to do this. Most
video recorders set the audio recording level
automatically-check the component’s instruc-
tion manual if you’re unsure.
a
You can only use this button when Speaker System
is set to ZONE 2.
Resetting the system
Use this procedure to reset all the receiver’s
settings to the factory default. Use the front
panel controls to do this. Set MULTI-ZONE to
MULTI ZONE OFF.
! Disconnect the iPod and USB memory device
from the receiver beforehand.
Making an audio or a video
recording
You can make an audio or a video recording
from the built-in tuner, or from an audio or video
source connected to the receiver (such as a CD
player or TV).
Keep in mind you can’t make a digital record-
ing from an analog source or vice-versa, so
make sure the components you are recording
to/from are hooked up in the same way (see
Connecting your equipment on page 11 for more
on connections).
! The receiver’s volume, Audio parameters (the
tone controls, for example), and surround
effects have no effect on the recorded signal.
! Some digital sources are copy-protected, and
can only be recorded in analog.
5
Start recording, then start playback of
the source component.
Dimming the display
! Set the Control with HDMI to OFF (see HDMI
Setup on page 44 ).
You can choose between four brightness levels
for the front panel display. Note that when
selecting sources, the display automatically
brightens for a few seconds.
Reducing the level of an
analog signal
1
2
Switch the receiver into standby.
While holding down ENTER on the
The input attenuator lowers the input level of an
analog signal when it’s too strong. You can use
this if you find that the OVER indicator lights
often or you can hear distortion in the sound.
The attenuator isn’t available with digital
sources, or when using the Stream Direct
(ANALOG DIRECT) modes.
%
Press
to the receiver operation
front panel, press u STANDBY/ON.
The display shows RESET c NO d.
mode, then press DIMMER repeatedly to
change the brightness of the front panel
display.
3
Select ‘RESET’ using PRESET k/l,
then press ENTER on the front panel.
The display shows RESET? OK.
! You can also choose to turn the display off. In
this case, the FL OFF indicator lights.
4
Press ENTER to confirm.
%
Press
to the receiver operation
OK appears in the display to indicate that the
receiver has been reset to the factory default
settings.
! Note that all settings will be saved, even if the
receiver is unplugged.
! Some video sources are copy-protected. These
cannot be recorded.
mode, then press A.ATT to switch the
input attenuator on or off.
Since the video converter is not available when
making recordings (from the video OUT jacks)
make sure to use the same type of video cable
for connecting your recorder as you used to
connect your video source (the one you want to
En
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
09
Using other functions
Setting
Default
AUTO
0 dB
Default system settings
DRC
Setting
Default
ON
SACD Gain
LFE Attenuate
Auto delay
Digital Safety
Digital Video Converter
SPEAKERS
0 dB
SB/FH
OFF
Normal(SB/
FH)
OFF
Speaker System
ExtendedStereo 90
Effect Level
Front
SMALL
SMALL
SMALL
SMALL
SMALLx2
YES
Other modes
Center Width
Dimension
Panorama
50
3
Center
FH/FW
Speaker Setting
Surr
2 PL II Music
Options
0
OFF
SB
SW
Neo:6 MUSIC:
3
Neo:6 CIN-
EMA: 10
Neo:6 Options
Center Image
Surround Position
Crossover
IN REAR
80 Hz
2 PL IIz Options Height Gain
MID
X-Curve
OFF
Listening Mode AUTO SUR-
DIMMER
Brightest
(2 ch/multi ch)
ROUND
All Inputs
Inputs
Listening Mode
(Headphones)
STEREO
See Input function default and possible settings on
page 27 .
See also Setting the Audio options on page 47 for
other default DSP settings.
HDMI
HDMI Audio
Control
Amp
ON
MCACC
M1: MEMORY
1
MCACC Position Memory
Control Mode
Display Power Off
DSP
PQLS
NO
Channel Level (M1 to M6)
0.0 dB
10’00’’
Speaker Distance (M1 to M6)
Power On Level
Volume Limit
Mute Level
LAST
OFF
FULL
ON
ATT of all chan-
nels/filters
0.0 dB
Standing Wave
(M1 to M6)
SWch Wide Trim 0.0 dB
All channels/
0.0 dB
Phase Control
EQ Data (M1
to M6)
bands
iPod/USB,
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY,
ADAPTER PORT
input function
EQ Wide Trim
0.0 dB
ON
Auto Sound
Retriever
Other input
functions
OFF
Sound Delay
Dual Mono
0.0 frame
CH1
En
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Controlling the rest of your system
If you can’t find a preset code that matches the
component you want to control, you can still
teach the remote individual commands from
Controlling the rest of your system
Operating multiple receivers
Up to four receivers can be operated discretely
using this receiver’s remote control when using
multiple receivers, provided they are of the
same model as this receiver. The receiver to be
operated is switched by inputting the preset
code to set the remote control setting.
! Set the remote modes on the receivers before
using this function (see Remote Control Mode
Setup on page 69 ).
another remote control (see Programming sig-
nals from other remote controls on page 54 ).
! For greater convenience, assign the TV
connected to the MONITOR OUT terminal to
the TV CTRL button, and assign your satellite/
cable receiver or set-top box connected to the
TV/SAT input terminal to the TV/SAT input
button. If a single device is connected to both
terminals, that device should be assigned to
both the TV CTRL and TV/SAT input buttons.
! Devices may be assigned to the following
input function buttons.
Setting
What it does
About the Remote Setup menu
This is a setting for changing only the
remote control unit’s operation screen,
without changing the receiver’s input,
when the remote control unit’s input
function buttons are pressed. This
is convenient for using the remote
control unit for devices not connected
to the receiver. See Direct function on
page 54 .
The Remote Setup mode is set by pressing the
number button while pressing RCU SETUP. The
different items on the Remote Setup menu are
described below. For their setting procedures,
refer to the explanations for the respective
items.
Direct
function
1
Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press
Setting
What it does
‘4’ for three seconds.
This function is used to erase remote
control codes that have been learned.
Codes learned for the different input
functions can be erased individually.
See Erasing one of the remote control
button settings on page 54 .
Preset codes can be set for the various
input functions. The remote control
codes of a number of other devices
(including products of other brands)
are preset in the remote control to
allow these devices to be operated.
See Selecting preset codes directly on
page 53 .
Release the button after the LED flashes once.
The LED continues to flash.
! To cancel the preset setup mode press
RCU SETUP.
Erase
learning
MULTI
RECEIVER
SOURCE
Preset
recall
OPERATION
RCU SETUP
2
Press the number button for the
BDR
BD
DVD
CD
DVR
HDMI
This is a function for resetting preset
codes that have been set. Key reset-
ting can be done for individual input
functions. See Erasing all learnt set-
tings that are in one input function on
page 54 .
receiver (“Receiver 1” to “Receiver 4”) you
wish to operate.
For example, to operate “Receiver 2”, press ‘2’.
If the LED lights for one second and continues
to flash, the setting has been successfully
completed.
When the preset code is input, the LED flashes
three times to indicate that the setting has
failed.
SAT
TV
HMG
ADPT
TV CTRL
Reset
function
USB
iPod
If the desired operations cannot be
performed even though you have set
the preset codes, the remote control
signals of other devices can be learned
directly. See Programming signals from
other remote controls on page 54 .
TUNER SIRIUS
ZONE2 RECEIVER
INPUT SELECT
Code
learning
This is a function for resetting all
remote control unit settings you have
made to the defaults set upon ship-
ment from the factory. See Resetting
the remote control settings on page 56 .
All reset
A series of the remote control opera-
tions for starting listening or viewing
can be programmed. Multiple remote
Selecting preset codes directly
Multi
1
Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press
operation control codes can be set for the differ-
ent input functions. See Multi Opera-
tion and System Off on page 55 .
If you have multiple Pioneer receivers,
amplifiers, etc., this setting can be
used to prevent other units from oper-
ating simultaneously when the remote
control unit is operated. See Operating
multiple receivers on page 53 .
‘1’ for three seconds.
Setting the remote to control
other components
Most components can be assigned to one of
the input function buttons (such as DVD or CD)
using the component’s manufacturer preset
code stored in the remote.
However, there are cases where only certain
functions may be controllable after assigning
the proper preset code, or the codes for the
manufacturer in the remote control will not
work for the model that you are using.
Release the button after the LED flashes once.
The LED continues to flash.
! To cancel the preset setup mode press
RCU SETUP.
Change
RC mode
This is a function for automatically
turning off the power of devices con-
System
off
nected to the receiver. Multiple remote
control codes can be set, as desired.
See Multi Operation and System Off on
page 55 .
2
Press the input function button for the
component you want to control.
When assigning preset codes to TV CONTROL,
press TV CTRL here.
Note
! You can cancel or exit any of the steps by
pressing RCU SETUP.
! After one minute of inactivity, the remote
automatically exits the operation.
The LED blinks once and flashes continuously.
En
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Controlling the rest of your system
3
Use the number buttons to enter the
4
Press the corresponding button on
2
Press the input function button
AUDIO
VIDEO
MULTI
RECEIVER
SOURCE
HDMI
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
OPERATION
4-digit preset code.
the other remote control that is sending
(teaching) the signal to this receiver’s
remote control.
If the LED lights for one second and continues
to flash, the setting has been successfully
completed.
! If the LED flashes for five seconds, it means
the memory is full. See Erasing all learnt
settings that are in one input function on
page 54 to erase a programmed button
you’re not using to free up more memory
(note that some signals may take more
memory than others).
! Note that interference from TVs or other
devices will sometimes result in the remote
control learning the wrong signal.
corresponding to the command to be
erased, then press ENTER.
The LED flashes once.
LIST TUNE TOOLS
RCU SETUP
TOP MENU
BAND
T.EDIT
GUIDE
See Preset code list on page 88 .
If the LED lights for one second and continues
to flash, the setting has been successfully
completed.
When the preset code is fully input, the LED
flashes three times to indicate that the setting
has failed. If this happens, enter the 4-digit
preset code again.
BDR
BD
DVD
CD
DVR
PRESET
ENTER
TUNE
PRESET
SAT
TV
3
Press and hold the button to be erased
HMG
ADPT
CATEGORY
RETURN
TV CTRL
USB
iPod
for three seconds.
If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has
been successfully completed.
HOME
MENU
TUNER SIRIUS
iPod CTRL
ZONE2 RECEIVER
INPUT SELECT
PGM MEMORY MENU
DVD
HDD
MASTER
PHASE CTRL
STATUS
INPUT
VOLUME
4
5
Repeat step 3 to erase other buttons.
Press RCU SETUP to exit the erasing
TV
/
DTV
MPX
PQLS
TV CONTROL
4
Repeat steps 2 through 3 for the other
S.RETRIEVER
1
AUDIO
mode.
CH
VOL
MUTE
components you want to control.
2
3
To try out the remote control, switch the com-
ponent on or off (into standby) by pressing u
SOURCE. If it doesn’t seem to work, select the
next code from the list (if there is one).
SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP
INFO
DISP
4
5
6
CH LEVEL A.ATT DIMMER
Erasing all learnt settings that
are in one input function
This operation erases all the operational
settings of other devices that have been pro-
grammed in one input function, and restores
the factory default.
7
8
9
CH
D.ACCESS
CLASS
ENTER
/
CLR
ALC
0
AUTO
/
/
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR
LISTENING MODE
DIRECT
5
Press RCU SETUP to exit the preset
! Some commands from other remote controls
cannot be learned, but in most cases the
remotes just need to be moved closer
together or farther apart.
setup mode.
1
Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press
‘2’ for three seconds.
This function is handy for erasing all data pro-
grammed for devices no longer being used.
Programming signals from
other remote controls
5
To program additional signals for the
Release the button after the LED flashes once.
The LED continues to flash.
! To cancel the preset setup mode press
RCU SETUP.
current component repeat steps 3 and 4.
To program signals for another component, exit
and repeat steps 2 through 4.
1
Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press
If the preset code for your component is not
available, or the available preset codes do not
operate correctly, you can program signals from
the remote control of another component. This
can also be used to program additional opera-
tions (buttons not covered in the presets) after
assigning a preset code.
The remote can store about 120 preset codes
from other components (this has been tested
with codes of Pioneer format only).
‘9’ for three seconds.
Release the button after the LED flashes once.
The LED continues to flash.
! To cancel the preset setup mode press
RCU SETUP.
6
Press RCU SETUP to exit the
2
Press the input function button for the
component you want to control.
The LED blinks once and flashes continuously.
programming mode.
3
Point the two remote controls towards
2
Press and hold the input function
Erasing one of the remote
control button settings
This erases one of the buttons you have pro-
grammed and restores the button to the factory
default.
each other, then press the button that will
be doing the learning on this receiver’s
remote control.
button corresponding to the command to
be erased for three seconds.
If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has
Certain buttons represent operations that can-
not be learned from other remote controls. The
buttons available are shown below:
The LED flashes once, then stops flashing,
been successfully completed.
remaining lit.
! The remote controls should be 3 cm (1 inch)
apart.
1
Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press
Direct function
‘7’ for three seconds.
! Default setting: On
Release the button after the LED flashes once.
The LED continues to flash.
! To cancel the preset setup mode press
RCU SETUP.
You can use the direct function feature to con-
trol one component using the remote control
while at the same time, using your receiver to
playback a different component. This could let
3 cm
(1 inch)
Other remote
control
This receiver’s
remote control
En
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Controlling the rest of your system
you, for example, use the remote control to set
up and listen to a CD on the receiver, and then
use the remote control to rewind a tape in your
VCR while you continue to listen to your CD
player.
When direct function is on, any component you
select (using the input function buttons) will be
selected by both the receiver and the remote
control. When you turn direct function off, you
can operate the remote control without affect-
ing the receiver.
The Multi operation feature makes it easy to
perform the following operations by pressing
just two buttons.
Press MULTI OPERATION and then the DVD
input function button to:
! Power on and off commands only work with
components that have a standby mode.
! Some remote controllers for other
! You don’t need to program the receiver to
switch on or off. This is done automatically.
With Pioneer components, you don’t need to
program the power to switch off in a shutdown
sequence (except DVD recorders).
manufacturers’ devices use the same signals
for switching the power on and off. In some
cases, even if this receiver is programmed to
perform these commands, power to the non-
Pioneer devices may not be switched on and
off correctly. Program the receiver to perform
these commands if the non-Pioneer device
uses separate signals for power on/off.
1. Switch this receiver on.
5
Repeat steps 3 to 4 to program a
2. Switch this receiver’s input to DVD.
3. Transmit a sequence of up to five pro-
grammed commands.
Similar to Multi operations, System off allows
you to use two buttons to stop and switch off
a series of components in your system at the
same time. Only one System off operation
sequence may be programmed.
Press MULTI OPERATION and then u SOURCE
to:
1. Transmit a sequence of up to five pro-
grammed commands.
2. Switch off all Pioneer devices including the
receiver (except DVD recorders and VCRs).
For greater convenience, program this receiver
to perform power on/off and playback opera-
tions on non-Pioneer devices as well. (The
signals for Pioneer devices described above
are not contingent on programming for non-
Pioneer devices.)
The buttons that can be programmed using
Multi operation or System off are the same but-
tons as those that can be programmed for other
remote controls (see Programming signals from
other remote controls on page 54 ).
sequence of up to five commands.
If you press RCU SETUP before programming is
completed, commands programmed up to that
point will be stored.
6
Press RCU SETUP to exit the
1
Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press
programming mode.
Programming a multi-operation
or a shutdown sequence
‘5’ for three seconds.
Release the button after the LED flashes once.
The LED continues to flash.
! To cancel the preset setup mode press
RCU SETUP.
Using multi operations
1
Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press
1
Press MULTI OPERATION.
‘3’ for three seconds.
Release the button after the LED flashes once.
The LED continues to flash.
Release the button after the LED flashes once.
The LED continues to flash.
! To cancel the preset setup mode press
RCU SETUP.
2
Press the input function button for the
component you want to control.
Press ‘1’ (On) or ‘0’ (Off) to switch the
2
Within five seconds, press an input
function button that has been set up with
a multi operation.
The receiver switches on (if it was in standby)
and the programmed multi operation is per-
formed automatically.
3
direct function mode.
2
Press the input function button (or u
If the LED lights for one second and continues
to flash, the setting has been successfully
completed.
If the LED flashes three times, the setting has
failed.
SOURCE button).
For Multi operations, press the input function
you wish to program (for example, if you want
to start the sequence by switching on your DVD
player, press DVD).
! With Multi operation, the HDMI and TV CTRL
settings cannot be made. For other settable
input functions, see Setting the remote to
control other components on page 53 .
For System off, press the u SOURCE button.
The LED blinks twice and flashes continuously.
Using System off
4
Press RCU SETUP to exit the setup.
1
Press MULTI OPERATION.
Release the button after the LED flashes once.
The LED continues to flash.
Multi Operation and System
Off
The Multi operation feature allows you to
program a series of up to 5 commands for the
components in your system.
! Be sure to call up the preset codes of devices
or perform programming signals for other
remote controls before multi operation
memory programming (page 54).
2
Within five seconds, press u SOURCE.
The command sequence you programmed will
run, then all Pioneer components will switch
off, followed by this receiver (switch of all the
zones becomes off).
! In order to avoid accidently switching off a
DVD recorder that is currently recording, no
DVD recorder power off codes are sent.
Note
! Before Multi operation and System off will
work correctly, you must setup the remote to
work with your TV and other components (see
Setting the remote to control other components
on page 53 for more on this).
! Some units may take some time to power up,
in which case multiple operations may not be
possible.
3
If necessary, press the input function
button for the component whose
command you want to input.
This is only necessary if the command is for a
new component (input function).
4
Select the button for the command
you want to input.
The LED blinks once and flashes continuously.
En
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Controlling the rest of your system
Erasing the settings for the
multi-operation
This erases all the settings programmed in the
remote control for the multi-operation.
Default preset codes
Controlling components
This remote control can control components after entering the proper codes (see Setting the remote
to control other components on page 53 for more on this). Use the input function buttons to select
the component.
! The TV CONTROL buttons on the remote control are dedicated to control the TV assigned to the
TV CTRL button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the TV CTRL button.
Input function button
Preset code
2158
DVD
BD
2160
1
Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press
DVR/BDR
HDMI
TV/SAT
CD
2150
‘8’ for three seconds.
2159
Release the button after the LED flashes once.
The LED continues to flash.
! To cancel the preset setup mode press
RCU SETUP.
RECEIVER MULTI
OPERATION
SOURCE
0116
RCU SETUP
BDR
5066
BD
DVD
DVR
HDMI
TV CTRL
0116
SAT
TV
CD
HMG
ADPT
2
Press the input function button
TV CTRL
USB
iPod
TUNER SIRIUS
containing the program you want to
cancel or the u SOURCE button for three
seconds.
If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has
been successfully completed.
ZONE2 RECEIVER
INPUT SELECT
MASTER
INPUT
VOLUME
MUTE
TV CONTROL
CH
VOL
AUDIO
VIDEO
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
LIST TUNE TOOLS
TOP MENU
BAND
T.EDIT
GUIDE
Resetting the remote control
settings
PRESET
ENTER
TUNE
PRESET
CATEGORY
RETURN
Use this procedure to reset all the remote con-
trol’s settings to the factory default.
! When preset codes are set, all the signals
learned in the input function buttons are
cleared. This function is convenient when you
want to reset some but not all of input function
buttons.
HOME
MENU
iPod CTRL
PGM MEMORY MENU
DVD
HDD
PHASE CTRL
STATUS
TV
/
DTV
MPX
PQLS
S.RETRIEVER
1
AUDIO
2
3
SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP
INFO
DISP
4
5
6
1
Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press
CH LEVEL A.ATT DIMMER
7
8
9
‘0’ for three seconds.
Release the button after the LED flashes once.
CH
D.ACCESS
CLASS
ENTER
/
CLR
ALC
0
AUTO
/
/
DIRECT STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR
The LED continues to flash.
LISTENING MODE
2
Press and hold the ENTER button for
three seconds.
RECEIVER
If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has
been successfully completed.
En
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Controlling the rest of your system
TV and Audio/Video components
Audio/Video components
TV
(Monitor)
HDD/BDR/
DVR
SAT/
CATV
CD/CD-R/
SACD
Button(s)
TV
BD/DVD
VCR
Button(s)
LD
MD/DAT
TAPE
POWER ON/ POWER ON/
POWER ON/ POWER ON/ POWER
POWER ON/
OFF
u SOURCE
POWER ON/OFF
POWER ON/OFF
numerics
POWER ON/OFF
POWER ON/OFF
—
u SOURCE
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
numerics
—
Number buttons
numerics
numerics
Number buttons numerics
k (dot) k (dot)
numerics
KURO LINK
CH ENTER
numerics
CLEAR
ENTER
numerics
+
numerics
*
CLEAR
<a>
k (dot)
+10
>10/CLEAR
CLEAR
ENTER (CLASS) CH ENTER
ENTER
—
ENTER
OPEN/CLOSE
<a>
ENTER (CLASS)
ENTER
TOP MENU
—
DISC/ENTER
—
ENTER
MSc
MSd
EXIT/INFO
EXIT
TOP MENU
TOP MENU
GUIDE
—
—
LIST
—
—
TOOLS/
GUIDE/EPG
TOOLS
<a>
USER MENU
GUIDE
LEGATO LINK
<b>
i/j/k/l
i/j/k/l
i/j/k/l
i/j/k/l
i/j/k/l
—
—
i/j/k/l
i/j/k/l
i/j/k/l
—
—
—
—
e/g/m/n
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
—
HOME MENU HOME MENU HOME MENU HOME MENU
—
—
HOME MENU
RETURN
SACD SETUP
<b>
—
—
—
—
—
RETURN
RETURN
RETURN
RETURN
HDD (Red)
Red
Red
—
—
HDD
DVD
—
—
Red
RETURN
—
DVD (Green)
Green
Green
Green
d
d
d
d
d
Yellow
Blue
Yellow
Blue
—
VCR
—
—
Yellow
Blue
(Yellow)
e
e
e
e
e
g
g
g
g
g
MENU
MENU
(Blue)
d
m
n
o
p
m
n
o
p
m
n
o
p
m
n
o
p
m
n
o
p
—
—
d
d
d
d
e
—
AUTO SETUP
FREEZE
—
e
e
e
e
g
—
g
g
g
g
m
n
o
p
AUDIO
—
m
n
o
p
AUDIO
m
n
o
p
AUDIO
m
n
—
m
n
o
p
AUDIO
PURE AUDIO
<b>
—
—
AUDIO
DISP
AUDIO
—
—
—
—
ANT
—
AV SELECTION
SCREEN SIZE
AUDIO
TIME
<b>
—
DISPLAY/INFO
AUDIO
AUDIO
a
b
Controls for MD.
Controls for SACD.
DISPLAY/
INFO
DISP
DISPLAY
CH +/–
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
—
OUTPUT
RESOLUTION
+/–
CH +/–
CH +/–
CH +/–
CH +/–
CH +/–
<a>
a
Controls for BD.
En
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Controlling the rest of your system
TV (Projector)
Button(s)
TV (Projector)
POWER ON
MOVIE
u SOURCE
1
2
STANDARD
DYNAMIC
USER1
3
4
5
USER2
6
USER3
7
COLOR+
SHARP+
GAMMA
8
9
0
COLOR–
k (dot)
SHARP–
ENTER (CLASS)
COLOR TEMP
EXIT
INFO
i/j/k/l
i/j/k/l
ENTER
ENTER
TEST
HIDE
MENU
m
d
HDMI1
HDMI2
n
o
e
COMP.
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
BRIGHT–
BRIGHT+
POWER OFF
ASPECT
g
p
AUDIO
DISP
CH +/–
CONTRAST+/–
En
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
The Advanced MCACC menu
MCACC preset. For details, see Setting
the Audio options on page 47 .
! EQ Type (only available when
the Auto MCACC Menu above is
EQ Pro & S-Wave) – This determines how
the frequency balance is adjusted.
The Advanced MCACC menu
CAUTION
! The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup
are output at high volume.
4
Select the setting you want to adjust.
Making receiver settings from
the Advanced MCACC menu
1
Select ‘Auto MCACC’ from the
Advanced MCACC menu, then press
ENTER.
If the Advanced MCACC screen is not dis-
played, refer to Making receiver settings from the
Advanced MCACC menu on page 59 .
! Full Auto MCACC – See Automatically
conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto
MCACC) on page 25 for a quick and effective
automatic surround setup.
! Auto MCACC – See Automatic MCACC
(Expert) on page 59 for a more detailed
MCACC setup.
! Manual MCACC – Fine-tunes your speaker
settings and customizes the Acoustic
Calibration EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on
page 61 ).
! Demo – No settings are saved and no errors
occur. When the speakers are connected
to this receiver, the test tone is output
repeatedly. Press RETURN to cancel the test
tone.
After a single calibration is performed, each
of the following three correction curves can
be stored separately in the MCACC memory.
SYMMETRY implements symmetric correc-
tion for each pair of left and right speakers
to flatten the frequency-amplitude charac-
teristics. ALL CH ADJ is a ‘flat’ setting where
all the speakers are set individually so no
special weighting is given to any one channel.
FRONT ALIGN sets all speakers in accordance
with the front speaker settings (no equalization
is applied to the front left and right channels).
If you selected ALL or Keep SP System as
your Auto MCACC menu, you can specify the
MCACC preset where you want to save the
SYMMETRY, ALL CH ADJ and FRONT ALIGN
settings.
! THX Speaker (only available when the
Auto MCACC Menu above is ALL or
Speaker Setting) – Select YES when using
THX speakers (all speakers other than the
front speakers are set to SMALL). In other
cases, leave at NO.
! STAND.WAVE Multi-Point (only available
when the Auto MCACC Menu above
is EQ Pro & S-Wave) – In addition to
measurements at the listening position,
you can use two more reference points for
which test tones will be analyzed for standing
waves. This is useful if you want to get a
balanced ‘flat’ calibration for several seating
positions in your listening area. Place the
microphone at the reference point indicated
on-screen and note that the last microphone
placement will be at your main listening
position:
The Advanced MCACC (Multi Channel ACoustic
Calibration) system was developed in Pioneer’s
laboratories with the aim of making it possible
for home users to perform adjustments of the
same level as in a studio easily and with high
precision. The acoustic characteristics of the
listening environment are measured and the
frequency response is calibrated accordingly
to allow high precision, automatic analysis and
optimal calibration of the sound field to bring it
closer to a studio environment than ever before.
Furthermore, while it was previously difficult
to eliminate standing waves, this receiver is
equipped with a standing wave control function
using a unique process to perform acoustic
analysis and reduce their influence.
2
Select the parameters you want to set.
Use i/j to select the item, then use k/l to
set.
! Auto MCACC – The default is ALL
(recommended), but you can limit the system
calibration to only one setting (to save time) if
you want.
— When data measurement is taken (after
selecting ALL or Keep SP System), the
reverb characteristics data (both before-
and after-calibration) that this receiver
had been storing will be overwritten.
— When measurement is performed
with other than SYMMETRY (after
selecting ALL or Keep SP System),
the reverberation characteristics after
calibration cannot be predicted, so
the graph for the characteristics after
calibration (“After”) cannot be displayed.
If you will need to display the graph for
the characteristics after calibration
(“After”), take the measurement using
the EQ Professional menu in the
Manual MCACC setup (page 61).
— The EQ Pro & S-Wave measurement is
also taken when ALL or Keep SP System
is selected. See Acoustic Calibration EQ
Professional on page 62 for more on this.
— Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ
Professional and Standing Wave can
be switched on and off in the respective
Automatic MCACC (Expert)
This section describes how to calibrate the
sound field automatically and fine-adjust the
sound field data manually.
If your setup requires more detailed settings
than those provided in Automatically conducting
optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on
page 25 , you can customize your setup options
below. You can calibrate your system differently
for up to six different MCACC presets, which are
useful if you have different listening positions
depending on the type of source (for example,
watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video
game close to the TV).
1
Press u RECEIVER to switch on the
receiver and your TV.
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this
receiver.
2
Press
on the remote control,
then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and
ENTER to navigate through the screens and
select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the
current menu.
Important
! Make sure the microphone/speakers are not
moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.
! The screen saver will automatically appear
after five minutes of inactivity.
! Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the
Home Menu.
3
Select ‘Advanced MCACC’ from the
Home Menu, then press ENTER.
En
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
The Advanced MCACC menu
Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the
speakers are properly connected.
If Reverse Phase is displayed, the speaker’s
wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the
speaker connections.
— If the connections were wrong, turn off
the power, disconnect the power cord,
then reconnect properly. After this,
perform the Auto MCACC procedure
again.
! The subwoofer distance setting may be
farther than the actual distance from the
listening position. This setting should
be accurate (taking delay and room
characteristics into account) and generally
does not need to be changed.
! If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results
are incorrect due to the interaction of the
speakers and viewing environment, we
recommend adjusting the settings manually.
You can also choose to view the settings by
selecting individual parameters from the
MCACC Data Check screen (see Checking
MCACC Data on page 63 ).
Press RETURN after you have finished check-
ing each screen. When you’re finished, select
RETURN to go back to the Home Menu.
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this
receiver upon completion of the Auto MCACC
Setup.
5
6
Follow the instructions on-screen.
Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to
3rd reference
point
2nd reference
point
finish outputting test tones.
1
2
A progress report is displayed on-screen while
the receiver outputs test tones to determine
the speakers present in your setup. Try to be as
quiet as possible while it’s doing this.
! With error messages (such as Too much
ambient noise! or Check microphone.),
select RETRY after checking for ambient
noise (see Problems when using the Auto
MCACC Setup on page 26 ) and verifying the
mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be
a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT
and continue.
3
Main listening
position
3
Connect the microphone to the MCACC
— If the connections were right, select
GO NEXT and continue.
SETUP MIC jack on the front panel.
Make sure there are no obstacles between the
speakers and the microphone.
8
Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press
ENTER.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while
the receiver outputs more test tones to deter-
mine the optimum receiver settings.
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is
happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.
! If you selected a STAND.WAVE Multi-Point
setup (in step 2), you will be asked to place
the mic at the 2nd and 3rd reference points
before finally placing it at your main listening
position.
! Do not adjust the volume during the test
tones. This may result in incorrect speaker
settings.
7
If necessary, confirm the speaker
configuration in the GUI screen.
5V
2.1A
The configuration shown on-screen should
reflect the actual speakers you have.
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds
while the speaker configuration check screen
is being displayed, the Auto MCACC Setup will
resume automatically. In this case, you don’t
need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in step 8.
! If you see an ERR message (or the speaker
configuration displayed isn’t correct),
there may be a problem with the speaker
connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work,
turn off the power and check the speaker
connections. If there doesn’t seem to be a
problem, you can simply use i/j to select
the speaker and k/l to change the setting
and continue.
iPod
iPhone
iPad
USB
HDMI 2 INPUT
MCACC
SETUP MIC
Microphone
9
The Auto MCACC Setup procedure
is completed and the Advanced MCACC
menu reappears automatically.
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup
should give you excellent surround sound
from your system, but it is also possible to
adjust these settings manually using the
Manual MCACC setup menu (starting below)
or Manual SP Setup menu (starting on page
65).
! Depending on the characteristics of your
room, sometimes identical speakers with
cone sizes of around 12 cm (5 inches) will
end up with different size settings. You
can correct the setting manually using the
Manual speaker setup on page 65 .
Tripod
If you have a tripod, use it to place the micro-
phone so that it’s about ear level at your
normal listening position. If you do not have
a tripod, use some other object to install the
microphone.
! It may not be possible to measure correctly
if the microphone is placed on a table, sofa,
etc.
! If the speaker is not pointed to the
microphone (listening position) or when
using speakers that affect the phase
(dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.),
4
When you’re finished setting the
options, select START then press ENTER.
En
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
The Advanced MCACC menu
! Fine Channel Level – Make fine adjustments
to the overall balance of your speaker system
(see Fine Channel Level on page 61 ).
! Fine SP Distance – Make precise delay
settings for your speaker system (see Fine
Speaker Distance on page 61 ).
! Standing Wave – Control overly resonant
low frequencies in your listening room (see
Standing Wave on page 61 ).
The last two settings are specifically for cus-
tomizing the parameters explained in Acoustic
Calibration EQ Adjust on page 62 :
! EQ Adjust – Manually adjust the frequency
balance of your speaker system while
listening to test tones (see Acoustic
Calibration EQ Adjust on page 62 ).
! EQ Professional – Calibrate your system
based on the direct sound coming
from the speakers and make detailed
settings according to your room’s reverb
characteristics (see Acoustic Calibration EQ
Professional on page 62 ).
! After pressing ENTER, test tones will be
output.
make the two tones sound as if they are arriving
simultaneously at a position slightly in front of
you and between your arm span.
Manual MCACC setup
You can use the settings in the Manual MCACC
setup menu to make detailed adjustments
when you’re more familiar with the system.
Before making these settings, you should have
already completed Automatically conducting
optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on
page 25 .
You only need to make these settings once
(unless you change the placement of your cur-
rent speaker system or add new speakers).
3
Select each channel in turn and adjust
! If you can’t seem to achieve this by adjusting
the distance setting, you may need to change
the angle of your speakers very slightly.
! The subwoofer’s test tone differs in tone from
other channels. Adjust so that the sound
of the subwoofer can be heard distinctly.
Note that when adjusting the subwoofer,
depending on the low frequency response of
your speaker, it may be difficult to hear the
change even when the setting is increased
or decreased or when the position of the
speaker is changed. Note that it may be
difficult to compare this tone with the other
speakers in your setup (depending on the
low frequency response of the reference
speaker).
the levels (+/–12.0 dB) as necessary.
Use k/l to adjust the volume of the speaker
you selected to match the reference speaker.
When it sounds like both tones are the same
volume, press j to confirm and continue to the
next channel.
! For comparison purposes, the reference
speaker will change depending on which
speaker you select.
! If you want to go back and adjust a channel,
simply use i/j to select it.
CAUTION
! The test tones used in the Manual MCACC
setup are output at high volume.
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup
menu.
Important
Fine Speaker Distance
! Press the MCACC button while the pertinent
setup screens are displayed to select MCACC
presets.
! Default setting: 10’00’’ (all speakers)
For proper sound depth and separation with
your system, it is necessary to add a slight bit of
delay to some speakers so that all sounds will
arrive at the listening position at the same time.
You can adjust the distance of each speaker
in half inch increments. The following setting
can help you make detailed adjustments that
you may not achieve using the Manual speaker
setup on page 65 .
! For some of the settings below, you’ll have to
connect the setup microphone to the front
panel and place it about ear level at your
normal listening position. Press HOME MENU
to display the Home Menu before you
connect the microphone to this receiver.
! See Problems when using the Auto MCACC
Setup on page 26 for notes regarding high
background noise levels and other possible
interference.
Fine Channel Level
! Default setting: 0.0dB (all channels)
When it sounds like the delay settings are
matched up, press j to confirm and continue
to the next channel.
! For comparison purposes, the reference
speaker will change depending on which
speaker you select.
You can achieve better surround sound by
properly adjusting the overall balance of your
speaker system. You can adjust the Channel
Level of each speaker in 0.5 dB increments. The
following setting can help you make detailed
adjustments that you may not achieve using the
Manual speaker setup on page 65 .
1
Select ‘Fine SP Distance’ from the
Manual MCACC setup menu.
Adjust the distance of the left channel
from the listening position.
Select each channel in turn and adjust
! If you want to go back and adjust a channel,
simply use i/j to select it.
! If you’re using a subwoofer, switch it on and
turn up the volume to the middle position.
1
Select ‘Fine Channel Level’ from the
2
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
Manual MCACC setup menu.
The volume increases to the 0.0 dB reference
level.
1
Select ‘Manual MCACC’ from the
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup
menu.
3
Advanced MCACC menu.
the distance as necessary.
See Making receiver settings from the Advanced
MCACC menu on page 59 if you’re not already
at this screen.
2
Adjust the level of the left channel.
Use k/l to adjust the delay of the speaker you
selected to match the reference speaker.
Listen to the reference speaker and use it to
measure the target channel. From the listening
position, face the two speakers with your arms
outstretched pointing at each speaker. Try to
Standing Wave
This will be the reference speaker level, so you
may want to keep the level around 0.0dB so that
you’ll have plenty of room to adjust the other
speaker levels.
! Default setting: ON/ATT 0.0dB (all filters)
Acoustic standing waves occur when, under
certain conditions, sound waves from your
speaker system resonate mutually with sound
2
Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you’re doing this for the first time, you might
want to make these settings in order.
En
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
The Advanced MCACC menu
waves reflected off the walls in your listen-
ing area. This can have a negative effect on
the overall sound, especially at certain lower
frequencies. Depending on speaker place-
ment, your listening position, and ultimately
the shape of your room, it results in an overly
resonant (‘boomy’) sound. The Standing Wave
Control uses filters to reduce the effect of overly
resonant sounds in your listening area. During
playback of a source, you can customize the
filters used for Standing Wave Control for each
of your MCACC presets.
Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of
room equalizer for your speakers (excluding the
subwoofer). It works by measuring the acoustic
characteristics of your room and neutralizing
the ambient characteristics that can color the
original source material (providing a ‘flat’ equal-
ization setting). If you’re not satisfied with the
adjustment provided in Automatically conduct-
ing optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC)
on page 25 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on
page 59 , you can also adjust these settings
manually to get a frequency balance that suits
your tastes.
! Reverb View – You can check the reverb
measurements made for specified frequency
ranges in each channel.
— If the Reverb View procedure is
performed after the Automatically
Acoustic Calibration EQ
Professional
This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of
room reverberation by allowing you to calibrate
your system based on the direct sound coming
from the speakers.
Performing the Acoustic Calibration EQ
Professional procedure is effective when the
lower frequencies seem overly reverberant in
your listening room (i.e. it sounds ‘boomy’) as
shown at Type A below, or when different chan-
nels seem to exhibit different reverb character-
istics as shown at Type B.
conducting optimum sound tuning
(Full Auto MCACC) on page 25 or
Reverb Measurement operation,
depending on the standing wave control
setting, differences may appear on the
reverb graph. With the Auto MCACC
function, the reverberations are
measured with the standing waves
controlled, so the reverb characteristics
graph shows the characteristics with the
effect of the standing waves eliminated.
By contrast, the Reverb Measurement
function measures the reverberations
without controlling the standing waves,
so the graph indicates the reverb
characteristics including the effect
of the standing waves. If you wish to
check the reverb characteristics of the
room itself (with the standing waves
as such), we recommend using the
Reverb Measurement function.
! Standing Wave control filter settings cannot
be changed during playback of sources using
the HDMI connection.
1
Select ‘EQ Adjust’ from the
Manual MCACC setup menu.
Select the channel(s) you want and
! Type A: Reverberance of high vs. low
frequencies
1
Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the
Manual MCACC setup menu.
Adjust the parameters for the Standing
2
Low
frequencies
Level
adjust to your liking.
2
Use i/j to select the channel.
Use k/l to select the frequency and i/j
to boost or cut the EQ. When you’re finished,
go back to the top of the screen and press k
to return to Ch, then use i/j to select the
channel.
! The OVER! indicator shows in the display
if the frequency adjustment is too drastic
and might distort. If this happens, bring the
level down until OVER! disappears from the
display.
High
frequencies
Wave Control.
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.
calibration range
Conventional MCACC
EQ calibration range
! Filter Channel – Select the channel to which
you will apply the filter(s): MAIN (all except
center channel and subwoofer), Center or
SW (subwoofer).
! TRIM (only available when the filter channel
above is SW) – Adjust the subwoofer channel
level (to compensate for the difference in
output post-filter).
! Freq / Q / ATT – These are the filter
parameters where Freq represents the
frequency you will be targeting and Q is the
bandwidth (the higher the Q, the narrower
the bandwidth, or range) of the attenuation
(ATT, the amount of reduction to the targeted
frequency).
Time
160
0
80
(in msec)
! Type B: Reverb characteristics for
different channels
Front L
Front R
Level
! Advanced EQ Setup – Use this to select the
time period that will be used for frequency
adjustment and calibration, based on the
reverb measurement of your listening area.
Note that customizing system calibration
using this setup will alter the settings you
made in Automatically conducting optimum
sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 25
or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 59 and
is not necessary if you’re satisfied with these
settings.
Conventional MCACC
EQ calibration range
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.
calibration range
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup
menu.
Time
(in msec)
0
80
160
Note
Using Acoustic Calibration EQ
Professional
! Changing the frequency curve of one channel
too drastically will affect the overall balance. If
the speaker balance seems uneven, you can
raise or lower channel levels using test tones
with the TRIM feature. Use k/l to select
TRIM, then use i/j to raise or lower the
channel level for the current speaker.
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup
menu.
1
Select ‘EQ Professional’, then press
ENTER.
Select an option and press ENTER.
! Reverb Measurement – Use this to
3
If you selected ‘Reverb Measurement’,
select EQ ON or EQ OFF, and then START.
The following options determine how the reverb
characteristics of your listening area are dis-
played in Reverb View:
2
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust
! Default setting: ON/0.0dB (all channels/
bands)
measure the reverb characteristics before
and after calibration.
En
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
The Advanced MCACC menu
! EQ OFF – You will see the reverb
characteristics of your listening area without
the equalization performed by this receiver
(before calibration).
Calibration : Before / After. Note that the
markers on the vertical axis indicate decibels in
2 dB steps.
Speaker Setting
Checking MCACC Data
Use this to display the speaker size and number
of speakers. See Speaker Setting on page 65 for
more on this.
At the procedure of Automatically conducting
optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on
page 25 , the procedure of Automatic MCACC
(Expert) on page 59 or after fine-adjusting at
Manual MCACC setup on page 61 , you can
check your calibrated settings using the GUI
screen.
5
If ‘Advanced EQ Setup’ is selected,
! EQ ON – You will see the reverb
characteristics of your listening area with the
equalization performed by this receiver (after
calibration). Note that the EQ response may
not appear entirely flat due to adjustments
necessary for your listening area.
— The calibration corresponding to the
currently selected MCACC preset will be
used when EQ ON is selected. To use
another MCACC preset, press MCACC to
select the MCACC memory you want to
store.
— After auto calibration with EQ Type
: SYMMETRY (Full Auto MCACC,
etc.), the graph for the inferred reverb
characteristics can be displayed by
selecting Reverb View. To display the
actually measured reverb characteristics
after EQ calibration, measure with
EQ ON.
select the MCACC memory to be stored,
then enter the desired time setting for
calibration, and then select START.
! To specify the place where the MCACC
memory is to be stored, press MCACC to
select the MCACC memory you want to store.
Based on the reverb measurement above, you
can choose the time period that will be used for
the final frequency adjustment and calibration.
Even though you can make this setting without
reverb measurement, it is best to use the mea-
surement results as a reference for your time
setting. For an optimal system calibration based
on the direct sound coming from the speakers,
we recommend using the 30-50ms setting.
Use k/l to select the setting. Use i/j to
switch between them.
Select the setting from the following time
periods (in milliseconds): 0-20ms, 10-30ms,
20-40ms, 30-50ms, 40-60ms, 50-70ms and
60-80ms. This setting will be applied to all
channels during calibration.
When you’re finished, select START. It will take
about 2 to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish.
After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is
set, you are given the option to check the set-
tings on-screen.
1
Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the
MCACC Data Check menu.
Select the channel you want to check.
2
Use i/j to select the channel. The corre-
sponding channel on the layout diagram is
highlighted.
1
Press
on the remote control,
then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and
ENTER to navigate through the screens and
select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the
current menu.
Channel Level
Use this to display the level of the various chan-
nels. See Channel Level on page 66 for more
on this.
2
Select ‘MCACC Data Check’ from the
Home Menu.
3 Select the setting you want to check.
1
Select ‘Channel Level’ from the
MCACC Data Check menu.
When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use
2
! Speaker Setting – Used to check the
settings of the speaker systems. See Speaker
Setting on page 63 for more on this.
! Channel Level – Used to check the output
level of the different speakers. See Channel
Level on page 63 for more on this.
! Speaker Distance – Used to check the
distance to the different speakers. See
Speaker Distance on page 63 for more on this.
! Standing Wave – Used to check the
standing wave control filter settings. See
Standing Wave on page 64 for more on this.
! Acoustic Cal EQ – Used to check
the calibration values of the listening
environment’s frequency response. See
Acoustic Cal EQ on page 64 for more on this.
k/l to select the MCACC preset you
want to check.
The level of the various channels set at the
selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is
displayed for channels that are not connected.
When the reverb measurement is finished,
you can select Reverb View to see the results
on-screen. See Professional Calibration EQ
graphical output on page 75 for troubleshooting
information.
Speaker Distance
Use this to display the distance from the dif-
ferent channels to the listening position. See
Speaker Distance on page 66 for more on this.
4
If you selected ‘Reverb View’, you can
check the reverb characteristics for each
channel. Press RETURN when you’re done.
The reverb characteristics are dis-
played when the Full Auto MCACC or
Reverb Measurement measurements are
conducted.
Use k/l to select the channel, frequency and
calibration setting you want to check. Use i/j
to go back and forth between the three. The
reverb characteristics graph before and after
EQ calibration can be displayed by selecting
1
Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the
MCACC Data Check menu.
When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use
2
k/l to select the MCACC preset you
want to check.
The distance from the various channels set at
the selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is
displayed for channels that are not connected.
4
Press RETURN to go back to the
MCACC Data Check menu, repeating steps
2 and 3 to check other settings.
5
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Home Menu.
En
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
The Advanced MCACC menu
3
Select the MCACC preset you’ll be
Standing Wave
Renaming MCACC presets
Data Management
copying the settings ‘From’, then specify
where you want to copy them (‘To’).
Make sure you don’t overwrite an MCACC
preset you’re currently using (this can’t be
undone).
Use this to display the standing wave related
adjustment values for the various MCACC
memories. See Standing Wave on page 61 for
more on this.
If you have several different MCACC presets
that you’re using, you may want to rename
them for easier identification.
This system allows you to store up to six
MCACC presets, allowing you to calibrate your
system for different listening positions (or
frequency adjustments for the same listening
position). This is useful for alternate settings
to match the kind of source you’re listening to
and where you’re sitting (for example, watching
movies from a sofa, or playing a video game
close to the TV).
From this menu you can copy from one preset
to another, name presets for easier identifica-
tion and clear any ones you don’t need.
! This can be done in Automatically conducting
optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on
page 25 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page
59 , either of which you should have already
completed.
1
Select ‘Memory Rename’ from the
Data Management setup menu.
Select the MCACC preset you want to
1
Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the
MCACC Data Check menu.
When ‘Filter Channel’ is highlighted,
4
Select ‘OK’ to confirm and copy the
settings.
2
When MCACC Memory Copy? is displayed,
select YES. If NO is selected, the memory is not
copied.
Completed! shows in the GUI screen to
confirm the MCACC preset has been cop-
ied, then you automatically return to the
Data Management setup menu.
2
rename, then select an appropriate preset
name.
Use i/j to select the preset, then k/l to
select a preset name.
use i/j to select the channel for which
you want to check standing wave control.
The standing wave related calibration value
for the selected channel stored at the selected
MCACC preset and its graph are displayed.
3
Repeat for as many MCACC presets
as necessary, then press RETURN when
you’re finished.
You will return to the Data Management setup
3
Press k to highlight ‘MCACC’, then
use i/j to select the MCACC preset you
want to check.
Clearing MCACC presets
menu.
If you are no longer using one of the MCACC
presets stored in memory, you can choose to
clear the calibration settings of that preset.
Acoustic Cal EQ
Copying MCACC preset data
1
Press
on the remote control,
Use this to display the calibration values for the
frequency response of the various channels set
in the different MCACC presets. See Acoustic
Calibration EQ Adjust on page 62 for more on
this.
If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic
Calibration EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on
page 61 ), we recommend copying your current
settings to an unused MCACC preset. Instead
of just a flat EQ curve, this will give you a refer-
ence point from which to start.
! The settings made in Automatically conducting
optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on
page 25 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page
59 .
then press HOME MENU.
1
Select ‘MCACC Memory Clear’ from the
Data Management setup menu.
Select the MCACC preset you want to
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and
ENTER to navigate through the screens and
select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the
current menu.
2
clear.
Make sure you don’t clear an MCACC preset
you’re currently using (this can’t be undone).
1
Select ‘Acoustic Cal EQ’ from the
MCACC Data Check menu.
When ‘Ch’ is highlighted, use i/j to
2
Select ‘Data Management’ from the
Home Menu.
3 Select the setting you want to adjust.
3
Select ‘OK’ to confirm and clear the
2
preset.
select the channel.
When MCACC Memory Clear? is displayed,
select YES. If NO is selected, the memory is not
cleared.
The calibration value for the frequency response
of the selected channel stored at the selected
MCACC preset and its graph are displayed.
! Memory Rename – Name your MCACC
presets for easy identification (see Renaming
MCACC presets on page 64 ).
1
Select ‘MCACC Memory Copy’ from the
Data Management setup menu.
Completed! shows in the GUI screen
to confirm the MCACC preset has been
cleared, then you automatically return to the
Data Management setup menu.
2
Select the setting you want to copy.
! All Data – Copies all the settings of the
selected MCACC preset memory.
! MCACC Memory Copy – Copy settings from
one MCACC preset to another (see Copying
MCACC preset data on page 64 ).
! MCACC Memory Clear – Clear any MCACC
presets that you don’t want (see Clearing
MCACC presets on page 64 ).
3
Press k to highlight ‘MCACC’, then
use i/j to select the MCACC preset you
want to check.
! Level & Distance – Copies only the channel
level and speaker distance settings of the
selected MCACC preset memory.
En
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
The System Setup and Other Setup menus
! Speaker System – Specifies how you are
another room (see Switching the speaker
terminals on page 50 ).
! Front Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re
bi-amping your front speakers (see Bi-amping
your speakers on page 14 ).
! ZONE 2 – Select to use the surround back
speaker terminals for an independent system
in another zone (see Using the MULTI-ZONE
controls on page 50 ).
The System Setup and Other Setup
menus
using your surround back speaker terminals
and B speaker terminals (page 65).
! Speaker Setting – Specifies the size and
number of speakers you’ve connected (page
65).
! Channel Level – Adjusts the overall balance
of your speaker system (page 66).
! Speaker Distance – Specifies the distance
of your speakers from the listening position
(page 66).
! Network Setup – Conducts the setup
necessary to connect this unit to the network
(see Network Setup menu on page 67 ).
Making receiver settings from
the System Setup menu
! HDMI Setup – Synchronizes this receiver
with your Pioneer component supporting
Control with HDMI (page 44).
! Other Setup – Makes customized settings
to reflect how you are using the receiver (see
The Other Setup menu on page 69 ).
The following section describes how to change
the speaker-related settings manually and make
various other settings (input selection, OSD
language selection, etc.).
3
If you selected Normal(SB/FH),
Normal(SB/FW), or Speaker B in Step 2,
select the placement of the surround
speakers.
! X-Curve – Adjusts the tonal balance of your
speaker system for movie soundtracks (page
67).
1
Press u RECEIVER to switch on the
In a 7.1-channel surround system with sur-
round speakers placed directly at the sides of
the listening position, the surround sound of
5.1-channel sources is heard from the side.
This function mixes the sound of the surround
speakers with the surround back speakers so
that the surround sound is heard from diago-
nally to the rear as it should be.
Depending on the positions of the speakers and
the sound source, in some cases it may not be
possible to achieve good results. In this case,
set the setting to ON SIDE or IN REAR.
! ON SIDE – Select when the surround
speakers is positioned right beside you.
! IN REAR – Select when the surround speaker
is positioned obliquely behind you.
receiver and your TV.
3
Make the adjustments necessary for
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this
each setting, pressing RETURN to confirm
after each screen.
receiver.
Manual speaker setup
2
Press
on the remote control,
This receiver allows you to make detailed set-
tings to optimize the surround sound perfor-
mance. You only need to make these settings
once (unless you change the placement of your
current speaker system or add new speakers).
These settings are designed to customize your
system, but if you’re satisfied with the settings
made in Automatically conducting optimum
sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 25 , it
isn’t necessary to make all of these settings.
then press HOME MENU.
Speaker system setting
! Default setting: Normal(SB/FH)
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and
ENTER to navigate through the screens and
select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the
current menu.
There are several ways you can use the speaker
terminals with this receiver. In addition to a
normal home theater setup where they are
used for the front height speakers or front wide
speakers, they can be used for bi-amping the
front speakers or as an independent speaker
system in another room.
! Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the
Home Menu.
3
Select ‘System Setup’ from the
Home Menu, then press ENTER.
1
Select ‘Speaker System’ from the
Manual SP Setup menu.
4
Select the setting you want to adjust.
! Manual SP Setup – Sets the type of
connection used for surround back terminals
and the size, number distance and overall
balance of the connected speakers (see
Manual speaker setup on page 65 ).
! Input Setup – Specifies what you’ve
connected to the digital, HDMI and
component video inputs (see The Input Setup
menu on page 26 ).
CAUTION
! The test tones used in the Manual SP Setup
are output at high volume.
4
When ‘Setting Change?’ is displayed,
See Making receiver settings from the System
Setup menu on page 65 if you’re not already at
this screen.
select Yes.
If No is selected, the setting is not changed.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
1
Select ‘Manual SP Setup’, then press
ENTER.
See Making receiver settings from the System
Setup menu on page 65 if you’re not already at
this screen.
2
Select the speaker system setting.
! Normal(SB/FH) – Select for normal home
theater use with front height speakers in your
main (speaker system A) setup.
Speaker Setting
Use this setting to specify your speaker configu-
ration (size, number of speakers and crossover
frequency). It is a good idea to make sure that
the settings made in Automatically conduct-
ing optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC)
on page 25 are correct. Note that this setting
! Normal(SB/FW) – Select for normal home
theater use with front wide speakers in your
main (speaker system A) setup.
! Speaker B – Select to use the B speaker
terminals to listen to stereo playback in
2
Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you are doing this for the first time, you may
want to adjust these settings in order:
! OSD Language – The GUI screen’s display
language can be changed (see Changing the
OSD display language (OSD Language) on
page 25 ).
En
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
The System Setup and Other Setup menus
applies to all MCACC presets, and cannot be
set independently.
the best bass results. Depending on the
speaker placement of your room you
— You can adjust this setting only
when Speaker System setting is
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
! If you’re using a THX speaker setup, set all
speakers to SMALL.
may actually experience a decrease in
the amount of bass due low frequency
cancellations. In this case, try changing
the position or direction of speakers. If
you can’t get good results, listen to the
bass response with it set to PLUS and
YES or the front speakers set to LARGE
and SMALL alternatively and let your ears
judge which sounds best. If you’re having
problems, the easiest option is to route
all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by
selecting SMALL for the front speakers.
If you select NO for the subwoofer the front
speakers will automatically be fixed to LARGE.
Also, the center, surround, surround back, front
height and front wide speakers can’t be set to
LARGE if the front speakers are set to SMALL.
In this case, all bass frequencies are sent to the
subwoofer.
Normal(SB/FW).
— If the surround speakers are set to NO,
this setting will automatically be set to
NO.
Channel Level
1
Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the
Manual SP Setup menu.
Choose the set of speakers that you
Using the channel level settings, you can adjust
the overall balance of your speaker system, an
important factor when setting up a home the-
ater system.
! Surr – Select LARGE if your surround
speakers reproduce bass frequencies
effectively. Select SMALL to send bass
frequencies to the other speakers or
subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround
speakers choose NO (the sound of the
surround channels is sent to the front
speakers or a subwoofer).
! SB – Select the number of surround back
speakers you have (one, two or none). Select
LARGEx2 or LARGEx1 if your surround
back speakers reproduce bass frequencies
effectively. Select SMALLx2 or SMALLx1 to
send bass frequencies to the other speakers
or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround
back speakers choose NO.
— If you selected ZONE 2 or Front Bi-Amp
(in Speaker system setting on page 65
) you can’t adjust the surround back
settings.
— If the surround speakers are set to
NO, the surround back speakers will
automatically be set to NO.
! SW – LFE signals and bass frequencies of
channels set to SMALL are output from the
subwoofer when YES is selected. Choose the
PLUS setting if you want the subwoofer to
output bass sound continuously or you want
deeper bass (the bass frequencies that would
normally come out the front and center
speakers are also routed to the subwoofer). If
you did not connect a subwoofer choose NO
(the bass frequencies are output from other
speakers).
2
want to set, then select a speaker size.
Use k/l to select the size (and number) of
each of the following speakers:
! Front – Select LARGE if your front speakers
reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or
if you didn’t connect a subwoofer. Select
SMALL to send the bass frequencies to the
subwoofer.
! Center – Select LARGE if your center speaker
reproduces bass frequencies effectively, or
select SMALL to send bass frequencies to
the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t
connect a center speaker, choose NO (the
center channel is sent to the front speakers).
! FH – Select LARGE if your front height
speakers reproduce bass frequencies
effectively, or select SMALL to send bass
frequencies to the other speakers or
subwoofer. If you didn’t connect front height
speakers, choose NO (the front height
channel is sent to the front speakers).
— You can adjust this setting only
when Speaker System setting is
1
Select ‘Channel Level’ from the
Manual SP Setup menu.
The test tones will start.
2
Adjust the level of each channel using
k/l.
Use i/j to switch speakers.
Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone
is emitted.
! If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL)
meter, take the readings from your main
listening position and adjust the level of each
speaker to 75 dB SPL (C-weighting/slow
reading).
3
Select ‘X. OVER’ and set the crossover
frequency.
Frequencies below this point will be sent to the
subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).
! This setting decides the cutoff between bass
sounds playing back from the speakers
selected as LARGE, or the subwoofer,
and bass sounds playing back from those
selected as SMALL. It also decides where
the cutoff will be for bass sounds in the LFE
channel.
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Note
! You can change the channel levels by press
to the receiver operation mode, then
press CH LEVEL, and then using k/l on the
remote control.
Channel level adjustment using CH LEVEL
and k/l is meant as a convenient way
to temporarily fine-adjust the sound being
played. This adjustment is not stored in the
MCACC memory’s channel level setting.
Normal(SB/FH).
— If the surround speakers are set to NO,
this setting will automatically be set to
NO.
! FW – Select LARGE if your front wide
speakers reproduce bass frequencies
effectively, or select SMALL to send bass
frequencies to the other speakers or
subwoofer. If you didn’t connect front wide
speakers, choose NO (the front wide channel
is sent to the front speakers).
! With Full Auto MCACC setup
or Auto MCACC setup (ALL or
Speaker Setting), the setting here will not
apply and the crossover frequency will be
automatically set. Crossover frequency is a
frequency aimed at achieving the optimal
sound field taking into account the bass
capacity of all connected speakers and
human aural characteristics.
Speaker Distance
For good sound depth and separation from
your system, you need to specify the distance of
your speakers from the listening position. The
receiver can then add the proper delay needed
for effective surround sound.
— If you have a subwoofer and like lots of
bass, it may seem logical to select LARGE
for your front speakers and PLUS for the
subwoofer. This may not, however, yield
! If you’re using THX speakers, confirm that
the crossover frequency is set to 80Hz.
En
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
The System Setup and Other Setup menus
1
Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the
Manual SP Setup menu.
Adjust the distance of each speaker
a built-in DHCP server function), simply turn on
‘Secondary DNS Server’ in the other DNS
server address field.
Network Setup menu
Setting up the network to listen to Internet radio
on this receiver.
the DHCP server function, and you will not need
to set up the network manually. You must set up
the network as described below only when you
have connected this receiver to a broadband
router without a DHCP server function. Before
you set up the network, consult with your ISP or
the network manager for the required settings.
It is advised that you also refer to the operation
manual supplied with your network component.
! In case you make changes to the network
configuration without the DHCP server
2
Proxy Hostname/Proxy Port
using k/l.
You can adjust the distance of each speaker in
1/2 inch Increments.
This setting is required when you connect
this receiver to the Internet via a proxy server.
Enter the IP address of your proxy server in the
‘Proxy Hostname’ field. Also, enter the port
number of your proxy server in the ‘Proxy Port’
field.
1
Press
on the remote control,
then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and
ENTER to navigate through the screens and
select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the
current menu.
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Note
1
Select ‘IP Address, Proxy’ from the
Network Setup menu.
Select the DHCP setting you want.
! For best surround sound, make sure the
surround back speakers are the same
distance from the listening position.
2
Select ‘System Setup’ from the
function, make the corresponding changes to
the network settings of this receiver.
Home Menu.
2
When you select ON, the network is automati-
cally set up, and you do not need to follow Steps
3. Proceed with Step 4.
If there is no DHCP server on the network and
you select ON, this receiver will use its own
Auto IP function to determine the IP address.
! The IP address determined by the Auto IP
function is 169.254.X.X. You cannot listen to
an Internet radio station if the IP address is
set for the Auto IP function.
3
Select ‘Network Setup’ from the
IP Address
System Setup menu.
X-Curve
The IP address to be entered must be defined
within the following ranges. If the IP address
defined is beyond the following ranges, you
cannot play back audio files stored on compo-
nents on the network or listen to Internet radio
stations.
Class A: 10.0.0.1 to 10.255.255.254
Class B: 172.16.0.1 to 172.31.255.254
Class C: 192.168.0.1 to 192.168.255.254
4
Select the setting you want to adjust.
Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too
bright when played back in large rooms. The
X-Curve setting acts as a kind of re-equalization
for home theater listening, and restores proper
tonal balance of movie soundtracks.
If you are doing this for the first time, you may
want to adjust these settings in order:
! IP Address, Proxy – Sets up the IP address/
Proxy of this receiver (page 67).
! Network Standby – Allows the AVNavigator
or iControlAV2 function to be used even
when the receiver is in the standby mode
(page 68).
1
Select ‘X-Curve’ from the
Manual SP Setup menu.
Choose the X-Curve setting you want.
2
3
Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask,
Use k/l to adjust the setting. The X-Curve
is expressed as a downwards slope in deci-
bels per octave, starting at 2 kHz. The sound
becomes less bright as the slope increases (to
a maximum of –3.0dB/oct). Use the following
guidelines to set the X-Curve according to your
room size:
Default Gateway, Primary DNS Server and
Secondary DNS Server.
Press i/j to select a number and k/l to
move the cursor.
! Friendly Name – The name of the receiver
displayed on a computer or other device
connected to the network can be changed
(page 68).
! Parental Lock – Restricts usage of network
functions (page 68).
! Port Number Setting – Sets the numbers of
the ports where signals from IP Control are
received (page 68).
! Wireless LAN Converter – Used to make the
wireless LAN converter’s access point and IP
address settings (page 68).
Subnet Mask
In case an xDSL modem or a terminal adapter
is directly connected to this receiver, enter the
subnet mask provided by your ISP on paper. In
most cases, enter 255.255.255.0.
4
Select ‘OFF’ or ‘ON’ for the
Enable Proxy Server setting to deactivate
or activate the proxy server.
In case you select ‘OFF’, proceed with Step 7. In
case you select ‘ON’, on the other hand, pro-
ceed with Step 5.
Default Gateway
Room size (ft2)
≤400 ≤550 ≤650 ≤800 ≤2200 ≤12000
–0.5 –1.0 –1.5 –2.0 –2.5 –3.0
In case a gateway (router) is connected to this
receiver, enter the corresponding IP address.
X-Curve
(dB/oct)
5
Enter the address of your proxy server
! If you select OFF, the frequency curve will be
flat and the X-Curve has no effect.
Primary DNS Server/
Secondary DNS Server
or the domain name.
Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the
position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.
For the wireless LAN converter, use the
separately sold AS-WL300.
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
In case there is only one DNS server address
provided by your ISP on paper, enter it in the
‘Primary DNS Server’ field. In case there are
more than two DNS server addresses, enter
IP address/Proxy setting
In case the router connected to the LAN termi-
nal on this receiver is a broadband router (with
En
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
The System Setup and Other Setup menus
Network connection settings require
approximately 2 minutes from the time the
WPS buttons are pressed. Wait until the
settings are completed.
! WPS (PIN) – Display a list of the SSIDs of
connectable access points and select the
access point to which you want to connect
from this list. Connection settings are made by
inputting the 8-digit PIN code displayed on the
receiver’s screen to the access point to which
you want to connect.
! Search for Access Point – Display a list of
the SSIDs of connectable access points and
select the access point to which you want to
connect from this list. Connection settings
with the access point are made by setting the
access point’s security protocol, security key
and WEP default key (only when the access
point’s security protocol is WEP).
! Manual Setting – Connection settings are
made by manually inputting the SSID, security
protocol, security key and WEP default key
of the access point to which you want to
connect.
6
Enter the port number of your proxy
4
If there are other port numbers you
server.
want to change, repeat steps 2 and 3.
Important
Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the
position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.
When the HOME MEDIA GALLERY input is
selected, the setting made here cannot be
reflected. Set the input to something other than
HOME MEDIA GALLERY before making this
setting.
Note
7
Select ‘OK’ to confirm the IP Address/
! When the wireless LAN converter (AS-WL300)
is connected, the port number cannot be set
to port 3.
Proxy setup.
! We recommend setting the port number to 23
or within the range of 49152 to 65535.
! When the port number is changed, network
communications between the receiver and
AVNavigator are no longer possible. In this
case, click Settings on the AVNavigator’s
function menu, select the IP Address tab
and input one of the port numbers set on the
receiver side to enable communications with
AVNavigator.
1
Select ‘Parental Lock’ from the
Network Setup menu.
Input the password.
Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the
position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.
Network Standby
This setting allows the AVNavigator or iContro-
lAV2 function for operating the receiver from a
computer connected on the same LAN as the
receiver to be used even when the receiver is in
the standby mode.
2
3
Specify whether to turn Parental Lock
on or off.
! OFF – Internet services are not restricted.
! ON – Internet services are restricted.
1
Select ‘Network Standby’ from the
Network Setup menu.
Specify whether the Network Standby
2
4
If you want to change the password,
select Change Password.
In this case, the procedure returns to step 2.
is ON or OFF.
! ON – The AVNavigator or iControlAV2
function can be used even when the receiver
is in the standby mode.
! OFF – The AVNavigator or iControlAV2
function cannot be used when the receiver
is in the standby mode (This lets you reduce
power consumption in the standby mode).
Wireless LAN Converter
This setting is required for connecting a wire-
less LAN converter to the receiver and using
wireless network functions.
For the wireless LAN converter, use the sepa-
rately sold AS-WL300.
Port Number Setting
On this receiver, there can be up to 5 numbers
of ports where signals are received. One of
these, port 8102 which used for communicating
with iControlAV2, cannot be changed, but the
desired number can be set for the 4 other ports.
Note
Access Point Setting
! If there is a “; ” (semicolon) in the access
point’s SSID or security key, wireless LAN
connection will not be possible even after
the wireless LAN converter settings are
completed. Change the setting of the access
point’s SSID or security key to a character
string that does not include a “; ” (semicolon).
Friendly Name
Make the connection settings for the wireless
LAN converter connected to the receiver and
the access point. Connect the wireless LAN
converter to the receiver and set DHCP on the
“IP Address, Proxy” settings menu beforehand
(page 67). There are four way to make the set-
tings for connecting to the access point, as
shown below.
! WPS (PBC) – Connection settings are made
automatically simply by pressing the WPS
buttons on the access point and wireless LAN
converter, following the instructions displayed
on the receiver’s screen. This is the simplest
way of making the settings, and is possible
when the access point and wireless LAN
converter are equipped with WPS buttons.
1
Select ‘Port Number Setting’ from the
Network Setup menu.
Select the port number you want to
change.
Input the port number.
! Use i/j to select a character, k/l to
set the position, and ENTER to confirm your
selection.
1
Select ‘Friendly Name’ from the
Network Setup menu.
Select ‘Edit Name’ then select
2
2
‘Rename’.
If after changing the name you want to restore
the name to the default, select Default.
3
WLAN IP Address
3
Input the name you want.
If the IP address of a device connected in the
LAN other than the wireless LAN converter
is set to “192.168.XXX.249”, the IP address of
the wireless LAN converter will be redundant,
making connection to the access point impos-
sible. In this case, use this setting to set an IP
address specific to the wireless LAN converter.
Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the
position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.
! It is not possible to set the same port number
more than once.
Parental Lock
Set restrictions for using Internet services. Also
set the password accompanying the usage
restrictions.
En
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
The System Setup and Other Setup menus
! “---” – When the power is turned on, the
volume is set to minimum level.
1
Select ‘Wireless LAN Converter’ from
the Network Setup menu.
Make the wireless LAN converter
Auto Power Down
The Other Setup menu
The Other Setup menu is where you can make
customized settings to reflect how you are
using the receiver.
The power can be set to turn off automatically if
no operation has been performed for a specific
amount of time with no audio or video signals
being input to the receiver. When using ZONE
2, the ZONE 2 power can also be set to turn off,
but for ZONE 2 the power turns off automati-
cally after the amount of time set here even if
signals are being input or operations have been
performed.
! –80.0dB to +12.0dB – Specify the volume to
be set when the power is turned on, in steps
of 0.5 dB.
It is not possible to set a volume level greater
than the value specified at Volume Limit setup
(see below).
2
settings as necessary.
When making the connection settings of the
wireless LAN converter and access point, select
“Access Point Setting” and make the connec-
tion settings for the wireless LAN converter and
access point following the instructions on the
screen.
If you want to set the wireless LAN converter’s
IP address, select “WLAN IP Address” and
input the IP address.
1
Press
on the remote control,
then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and
ENTER to navigate through the screens and
select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the
current menu.
3
Select the Volume Limit setting you
want.
Use this function to limit the maximum volume.
The volume cannot be increased above the level
set here, even by operating MASTER VOLUME
button (or the dial on the front panel).
! OFF (default) – The maximum volume is not
limited.
Different times can be set for the main zone and
ZONE 2.
2
Select ‘System Setup’ from the
1
Select ‘Auto Power Down’ from the
Other Setup menu.
Select the zone you want to set and set
Home Menu.
3
4
Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER.
Select the setting you want to adjust.
Checking the Network
Information
The setting status of the following network-
related items can be checked.
! IP Address – Check the IP address of this
receiver.
2
! –20.0dB/–10.0dB/0.0dB – The maximum
volume is limited to the value set here.
the time after which the power turns off.
! MAIN – The time can be selected from
among “15 min”, “30 min”, “60 min” and
“OFF”. The power turns off after there has
been no signal and no operation for the
selected time.
! ZONE 2 – The time can be selected from
among “30 min”, “1 hour”, “3 hours”,
“6 hours”, “9 hours” and “OFF”. The power
turns off after the selected time.
If you are doing this for the first time, you may
want to adjust these settings in order:
! Auto Power Down – Sets the power to turn
off automatically when the receiver is not
being used.
! Volume Setup – Sets up the volume-related
operations of this receiver (page 69).
! Remote Control Mode Setup – Sets this
receiver’s remote control mode (page 69).
! Flicker Reduction Setup – Adjusts the way
the GUI screen looks (page 70).
! Software Update – Use to update the
receiver’s software and check the version.
! Pairing Bluetooth Setup – Use to pair a
Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless
technology device (page 34).
4
Select the Mute Level setting you
want.
This sets how much the volume is to be turned
down when MUTE is pressed.
! FULL (default) – No sound.
! –40.0dB/–20.0dB – The volume will be
turned down to the level specified here.
! MAC Address – Check the MAC address of
this receiver.
! Friendly Name – Friendly Name on page 68 .
! SSID – Check the SSID of the access point
connected with the wireless LAN converter
(only when a wireless LAN converter is
connected).
5
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
Volume Setup
You can set the maximum volume of this
receiver or specify what the volume level will be
when the power is turned on.
1
Press
on the remote control,
Remote Control Mode Setup
! Default setting: 1
This sets this receiver’s remote control mode
to prevent erroneous operation when multiple
units of the receiver are being used.
then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and
ENTER to navigate through the screens and
select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the
current menu.
1
Select ‘Volume Setup’ from the
Other Setup menu.
Select the Power ON Level setting you
5
Make the adjustments necessary for
2
each setting, pressing RETURN to confirm
after each screen.
1
Select ‘Remote Control Mode Setup’
from the Other Setup menu.
Select the Remote Control Mode
setting you want.
Select ‘OK’ to change the remote
control mode.
want.
2
Select ‘Network Information’ from the
The volume can be set so that it is always set
to the same level when the receiver’s power is
turned on.
! LAST (default) – When the power is turned
on, the volume is set to the same level as
when the power was last turned off.
2
Home Menu.
Display the setting status of the network-related
items.
3
En
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
The System Setup and Other Setup menus
When downloading an update file from the
4
Follow the instructions on the screen
Software Update messages
Pioneer website onto your computer, the file
will be in ZIP format. Unzip the ZIP file before
saving it on the USB memory device. If there
are any old downloaded files or downloaded
files for other models on the USB memory
device, delete them.
to change the remote control’s setting.
See Operating multiple receivers on page 53 .
Status
Descriptions
messages
5
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
No update file was found on the
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
NO UPDATE
FILE
USB memory device. Store the file
in the USB memory device’s root
directory.
Flicker Reduction Setup
! Default setting: OFF
Try disconnecting then reconnect-
ing the USB device or storing the
update file again. If the error still
occurs, try using a different USB
memory device.
Important
! DO NOT unplug the power cord during
updating.
! When updating via the Internet, do not
disconnect the LAN cable. When updating via
a USB memory device, do not disconnect the
USB memory device.
The GUI screen’s resolution can be increased.
If you feel the GUI screen is hard to see, try
changing this setting. Note that the resolution
in this setting only affects the GUI screen; it has
no influence on the video output.
FILE ERROR
UPDATE
ERROR 1
to UPDATE
ERROR 7
Turn the receiver’s power off, then
turn it back on and try updating the
software again.
1
Select ‘Flicker Reduction Setup’ from
the Other Setup menu.
Select the Flicker Reduction setting you
want.
1
Select ‘Software Update’ from the
Other Setup menu.
If this message flashes, updating
has failed. Update via a USB mem-
ory device. Put the update file on a
USB memory device and connect
the device to the USB port. When
the file is found, software updating
starts automatically.
2
2
Select the update procedure.
! Update via Internet – The receiver checks
whether updatable software is available via
the Internet.
! Update via USB Memory – The receiver
checks whether the USB memory device
inserted into the USB port on the receiver’s
front panel contains updatable software.
“Accessing” is displayed and the update file
is checked. Wait a while.
Update via
USB
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
Software Update
UE11
UE22
UE33
Updating has failed. Use the same
procedure to update the software
again.
Use this procedure to update the receiver’s
software and check the version. There are two
ways to update: via the Internet and via a USB
memory device.
Updating via the Internet is performed by
accessing the file server from the receiver and
downloading the file. This procedure is only pos-
sible if the receiver is connected to the Internet.
Updating via a USB memory device is per-
formed by downloading the update file from a
computer, reading this file onto a USB memory
device then inserting this USB memory device
into the USB port on the receiver’s front panel.
With this procedure, the USB memory device
containing the update file must first be inserted
into the USB port on the receiver’s front panel.
! If an update file is provided on the Pioneer
website, download it onto your computer.
3
Check on the screen whether or not an
update file was found.
If “New version found.” is displayed, the
update file has been found. The version number
and updating time are displayed.
If “This is the latest version. There is no need
to update.” is displayed, no update file has
been found.
4
To update, select OK.
The updating screen appears and updating is
performed.
! The power turns off automatically once
updating is completed.
En
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Additional information
Symptom
Remedy
Additional information
The receiver suddenly switches off or the
FL OFF indicator blinks.
There is a problem with the receiver’s power unit or fan. Try turning
on the power. If the same thing happens, the receiver is damaged.
Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized
independent service company. (Other symptoms may appear when
the power is turned on.)
Troubleshooting 1
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is
something wrong with this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in
another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the
trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer
authorized independent service company to carry out repair work.
OVERHEAT blinks in the display or AMP
OVERHEAT and the FL OFF indicator flash ing back on (see Installing the receiver on page 6 ).
and the power turns off.
Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated place before switch-
Wait at least 1 minute, then try turning the power on again.
The temperature within the unit has exceeded the allowablevalue.
Lower the volume level.
! If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the
power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
The receiver suddenly power off or
ADVANCED MCACC flashes.
The power unit is damaged. Unplug the receiver from the wall and
call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.
Power
Display blinks 12V TRG ERR.
An error has arisen in the 12 V trigger jacks. Reconnect accurately
then turn the power back on.
Symptom
Remedy
The power does not turn on.
Make sure that the power cord is plugged in to an active power
outlet.
No sound
Try disconnecting from the power outlet, then plugging back in.
Symptom
Remedy
Power cannot be turned off. (ZONE 2 ON
is displayed.)
Press the remote control’s ZONE 2, then press u RECEIVER to
switch the Zone 2 off.
No sound is output when an input func-
tion is selected.
No sound is output from the front speak-
ers.
Check the volume, mute setting (press MUTE) and speaker setting
(press SPEAKERS).
The receiver suddenly switches off or the
iPod iPhone iPad indicator blinks.
Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching
the rear panel or another set of wires. If so, re-attach the speaker
wires, making sure there are no stray strands.
Make sure the correct input function is selected.
Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected.
Make sure the correct input signal is selected (press SIGNAL SEL).
The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the
power and call a Pioneer authorized independent service com-
pany.
Note that when Fixed PCM ON is selected, you won’t be able to
hear any other signal format (see Setting the Audio options on
page 47 ).
During loud playback the power suddenly Turn down the volume.
switches off.
Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the Manual MCACC
Check that the source component is connected properly (see Con-
setup on page 61 .
necting your equipment on page 11 ).
Switch on the digital safety feature. While holding down ENTER on
the front panel, press u STANDBY/ON to set this receiver to the
standby mode. Use TUNE i/j to select D.SAFETY cOFFd, and
then use PRESET k/l to select 1 or 2 (select D.SAFETY cOFFd
to deactivate this feature). If the power switches off even with 2
switched on, turn down the volume. With 1 or 2 on, some features
may be unavailable.
Check that the speakers are connected properly (see Connecting
the speakers on page 13 ).
No sound from the surround or center
speakers.
Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround
Advance mode isn’t selected; select one of the surround listening
modes (see Listening in surround sound on page 36 ).
Check that the surround/center speakers are not set to NO (see
Speaker Setting on page 65 ).
The unit does not respond when the but-
tons are pressed.
Try switching the receiver off, then back on again.
Check the channel level settings (see Channel Level on page 66 ).
Try disconnecting the power cord, then connect again.
Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on
page 13 ).
AMP ERR blinks in the display, then the
power automatically switches off. The
ADVANCED MCACC blinks and the power authorized independent service company.
does not turn on.
The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the
receiver on. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer
En
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Additional information
Symptom
Remedy
Symptom
Remedy
No sound from surround back speakers.
Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or
SMALL, and the surround speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker
Setting on page 65 ).
No sound from one speaker.
Check the speaker connection (see Connecting the speakers on
page 13 ).
Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 66 ).
Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on
page 13 ). If only one surround back speaker is connected, make
sure it’s connected to the left channel speaker terminal.
Check that the speaker hasn’t been set to NO (see Speaker Setting
on page 65 ).
The channel may not be recorded in the source. By using one of
the advanced effect listening modes, you may be able to create the
missing channel (see Listening in surround sound on page 36 ).
Surround back speakers will not play while the Speaker System is
set to Speaker B and audio is being played through speaker B.
When Speaker System is set to Normal(SB/FH) or
Sound is produced from analog compo-
nents, but not from digital ones (DVD, LD, the input signal on page 37 ).
CD, etc.).
Check that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing
Normal(SB/FW) and SP: FH ON or SP: FW ON is selected with the
SPEAKERS button, no sound will be output from the surround back
speakers. Select SP: SB/FH ON, SP: SB/FW ON or SP: SB ON (see
Switching the speaker terminals on page 50 ).
Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input
jack the component is connected to (see The Input Setup menu on
page 26 ).
No sound from front height or front wide
speakers.
Check that the front height or front wide speakers are set to
LARGE or SMALL, and the surround speakers are not set to NO
(see Speaker Setting on page 65 ).
Check the digital output settings on the source component.
If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure
this is not turned down.
When Speaker System is set to Normal(SB/FH) or
No sound is output or a noise is output
when Dolby Digital/DTS software is
played back.
Check that your BD or DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital/
DTS discs.
Normal(SB/FW) and SP: SB ON is selected with the SPEAKERS
button, no sound will be output from the front height or front wide
speakers. Select SP: SB/FH ON, SP: SB/FW ON, SP: FH ON or SP:
FW ON (see Switching the speaker terminals on page 50 ).
Check the digital output settings or the HDMI audio output set-
tings of your BD or DVD player. Make sure that the DTS signal
output is set to On.
Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on
page 13 ).
If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure
this is not turned down.
No sound from subwoofer.
Check that the subwoofer is connected properly, switched on and
the volume turned up.
No sound when using the Home Menu.
If the HDMI input function is selected, sound is muted until exiting
the Home Menu.
If your subwoofer has a sleep function, make sure it is switched off.
Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS (see Speaker
Setting on page 65 ).
Other audio problems
Symptom
Remedy
The crossover frequency may be set too low; try setting it higher
to match the characteristics of your other speakers (see Speaker
Setting on page 65 ).
Speaker switching sound (clicking sound) Depending on the listening mode, the front height (or front wide)
is heard from receiver during playback.
and surround back speakers may switch automatically in function
of changes in the input audio. A speaker switching sound (clicking
sound) will be heard from the receiver at this time. If this sound
bothers you, we recommend to change the speaker terminal
option (see Switching the speaker terminals on page 50 ).
If there is very little low frequency information in the source mate-
rial, change your speaker settings to Front: SMALL / Subwoofer:
YES, or Front: LARGE / Subwoofer: PLUS (see Speaker Setting on
page 65 ).
Broadcast stations cannot be selected
automatically, or there is considerable
noise in radio broadcasts.
Fully extend the FM wire antenna, adjust the position for best
reception and secure to a wall, etc.
Check that the LFE channel is not set to OFF, or to a very quiet set-
ting (see Setting the Audio options on page 47 ).
Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 20).
Adjust the position and direction of the AM antenna.
Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 66 ).
Noise may be caused by interference from other equipment, such
as a fluorescent light, motor, etc. Switch off or move the other
equipment, or move the AM antenna.
En
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Additional information
ADAPTER PORT terminal
Symptom
Remedy
Noise is output when scanning a DTS CD. This is not a malfunction of the receiver. The scan function of your
player alters the digital information, making it unreadable, result-
Symptom
Remedy
The Bluetooth wireless technology device Check that no object that emits electromagnetic waves in the 2.4
ing in noise being output. Lower the volume when scanning.
cannot be connected or operated. Sound
from the Bluetooth wireless technology
device is not emitted or the sound is
interrupted.
GHz band (microwave oven, wireless LAN device or Bluetooth
wireless technology apparatus) is near the unit. If such an object
is near the unit, set the unit far from it. Or, stop using the object
emitting the electromagnetic waves.
When playing a DTS format LD there is
audible noise on the soundtrack.
Make sure that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choos-
ing the input signal on page 37 ).
Can’t record audio.
You can only make a digital recording from a digital source, and an
analog recording from an analog source.
Check that the Bluetooth wireless technology device is not too
far from the unit and that obstructions are not set between the
Bluetooth wireless technology device and the unit. Set the Blue-
tooth wireless technology device and the unit so that the distance
between them is less than about 10 m (33 ft.) and no obstructions
exist between them.
For digital sources, make sure that what you’re recording isn’t
copy protected.
Subwoofer output is very low.
To route more signal to the subwoofer, set it to PLUS or set the
front speakers to SMALL (see Speaker Setting on page 65 ).
Everything seems to be set up correctly,
but the playback sound is odd.
The speakers may be out of phase. Check that the positive/negative
speaker terminals on the receiver are matched with the corre-
sponding terminals on the speakers (see Connecting the speakers
on page 13 ).
Check that the Bluetooth ADAPTER and the ADAPTER PORT of the
unit are correctly connected.
The Bluetooth wireless technology device may not be set to the
communication mode supporting the Bluetooth wireless technol-
ogy. Check the setting of the Bluetooth wireless technology device.
The Phase Control feature doesn’t seem
to have an audible effect.
If applicable, check that the lowpass filter switch on your sub-
woofer is off, or the lowpass cutoff is set to the highest frequency
setting. If there is a PHASE setting on your subwoofer, set it to 0º
(or depending on the subwoofer, the setting where you think it has
the best overall effect on the sound).
Check that pairing is correct. The pairing setting was deleted from
this unit or the Bluetooth wireless technology device. Reset the
pairing.
Check that the profile is correct. Use a Bluetooth wireless technol-
ogy device that supports A2DP profile and AVRCP profile.
Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all speakers
(see Speaker Distance on page 66 ).
Noise or hum can be heard even when
there is no sound being input.
Check that personal computers or other digital components con-
nected to the same power source are not causing interference.
Video
Symptom
Remedy
Can’t select some Input functions by the
INPUT SELECTOR on the front panel or
the INPUT SELECT button on the remote
control.
Check the Input Skip settings in the Input Setup menu (see The
Input Setup menu on page 26 ).
No image is output when an input is
selected.
Check the video connections of the source component.
Check the HDMI Input assignment in the Input Setup menu then
try OFF (see The Input Setup menu on page 26 ).
For HDMI, or when digital video conversion is set to OFF and a TV
and another component are connected with different cords (in
Setting the Video options on page 49 ), you must connect your TV
to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to
connect your video component.
There seems to be a time lag between the See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto
speakers and the output of the subwoofer. MCACC) on page 25 to set up your system again using MCACC
(this will automatically compensate for a delay in the subwoofer
output).
Make sure the input assignment is correct for components con-
nected using component video or HDMI cables (see The Input
Setup menu on page 26 ).
The maximum volume available (shown in Check that the Volume Limit is set to OFF (see Volume Setup on
the front panel display) is lower than the
page 69 ).
+12dB maximum.
Check the video output settings of the source component.
Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct.
The channel level setting may be over 0.0dB.
The volume level drops automatically.
The temperature within the unit has exceeded the allowable value.
Try moving the unit for better ventilation (see Installing the receiver
on page 6 ).
Some components (such as video game units) have resolutions
that may not be converted. If adjusting this receiver’s Resolu-
tion setting (in Setting the Video options on page 49 ) and/or the
resolution settings on your component or display doesn’t work, try
switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the Video options on
page 49 ) to OFF.
En
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Additional information
Settings
Symptom
Remedy
Can’t record video.
Check that the source is not copy-protected.
Symptom
Remedy
The video converter is not available when making recordings.
Check that the same type of video cable is used for connecting
both the recorder and the video source (the one you want to
record) to this receiver.
The Auto MCACC Setup continually
shows an error.
The ambient noise level may be too high. Keep the noise level in
the room as low as possible (see also Problems when using the
Auto MCACC Setup on page 26 ). If the noise level cannot be kept
low enough, you will have to set up the surround sound manually
(page 65).
Noisy, intermittent, or distorted picture.
Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during
scanning, for example), or the video quality may just be poor (with
some video game units, for example). The picture quality may also
depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the
video converter and reconnect the source and display device using
the same type of connection (component or composite), then start
playback again.
When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the
SURROUND BACK L (Single) terminals.
To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround speakers for
the surround channel, not the surround back channel.
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the
microphone.
Video signals are not output from the
component terminal.
When a monitor only compatible with resolutions of 480i is con-
nected to the component terminal and another monitor is con-
nected to the HDMI terminal, the video signals may not be output
to the monitor connected to the component terminal. If this hap-
pens, do the following:
— Turn off the power of the monitor connected to the HDMI ter-
minal.
— Change the VIDEO PARAMETER menu RES setting (see Setting
the Video options on page 49 ).
— Video signals from the HDMI terminal cannot be output to the
component terminals. Input the video signals from the player or
other source to the composite or component terminals. When
using the component terminal, assign it at Input Setup (see The
Input Setup menu on page 26 ).
If Reverse Phase is displayed, try the following:
— The speaker’s wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the
speaker connections.
— Depending on the type of speakers and their installation con-
ditions, Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers
are properly connected. If this happens, select GO NEXT and
continue.
— If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening posi-
tion) or when using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speak-
ers, reflective speakers, etc.), it may not be possible to properly
identify the polarity.
After using the Auto MCACC Setup, the
speaker size setting is incorrect.
There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from
an air-conditioner, motor, etc. Switch off all other appliances in the
room and use Auto MCACC Setup again.
Depending on a number of factors (bass reproduction capabili-
ties of the speakers, room size, speaker placement, etc.) this may
occur in some cases. Change the speaker setting manually in
Speaker Setting on page 65 , and use the ALL (Keep SP System)
option for the Auto MCACC menu in Automatic MCACC (Expert)
on page 59 if this is a recurring problem.
Can’t adjust the Fine Speaker Distance
setting properly.
Check that the speakers are all in phase (make sure the positive
(+) and negative (–) terminals are matched up properly).
The display shows KEY LOCK ON when
With the receiver in standby, press u STANDBY/ON for about 10
you try to make settings.
seconds while holding down SPEAKERS to disable the key lock.
Most recent settings have been erased.
The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting
this setting.
Settings are only stored if all the zones are turned off. Turn off all
the zones before unplugging the power cord.
The various system settings are not
stored.
Do not pull out the power cord while conducting the settings. (The
settings will be stored when both the main zone and sub zone turn
off. Turn off all zones before pulling out the power cord.)
En
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Additional information
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output
Symptom Remedy
Symptom
Remedy
When playing a disc with the listening
mode set to Auto Surround or ALC, 2
Pro Logic II or DTS Neo:6 appear on the
receiver.
Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choos-
ing the input signal on page 37 ).
The reverb characteristics graph after EQ There are cases where the graph does not appear flat (even when
If a two channel soundtrack is currently playing (including Dolby
Surround encoded), then this is not a malfunction. Check the disc
packaging for details about the audio tracks available.
calibration does not appear entirely flat.
selecting ALL CH ADJ in the Auto MCACC Setup) due to adjust-
ments made to compensate for room characteristics to achieve
optimal sound.
During playback of DVD-Audio, the dis-
play shows PCM.
This will occur when playing DVD-Audio material over the HDMI
connection. This is not a malfunction.
Areas of the graph may appear identical (before and after) when
there is little or no adjustment needed.
The power turns off automatically and
some indicator flashes, or some indicator
flashes and the power does not turn on.
See the Power section (page 71).
The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing
before and after measurements.
EQ adjustments made using the Manual
MCACC setup do not appear to change
the reverb characteristics graph after EQ
calibration.
Despite level adjustments being made, the filters used for analysis
may not display these adjustments in the reverb characteristics
graph after EQ calibration. However, these adjustments are taken
into account by the filters dedicated to overall system calibration.
Remote control
Symptom
Remedy
Lower frequency response curves do not
seem to have been calibrated for SMALL
speakers.
Low frequencies used in bass management (the subwoofer chan-
nel) will not change for speakers that have been specified as
SMALL in the configuration, or do not output these frequencies.
Cannot be remote controlled.
Set the remote control unit’s remote control mode so that it
matches the setting on the main unit (see Operating multiple
receivers on page 53 ).
Calibration is performed, but due to your speakers’ low frequency
limitations, no measurable sound is output for display.
Check whether the receiver’s remote control mode is properly set
(see Remote Control Mode Setup on page 69 ).
Try replacing the batteries in the remote control (see Loading the
batteries on page 6 ).
Display
Symptom
Remedy
Be sure to operate within 7 m (23 ft.) and a 30º angle of the remote
sensor on the front panel (see Operating range of remote control
unit on page 6 ).
The display is dark or off.
Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness.
You can’t get DIGITAL to display when
using SIGNAL SEL.
Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital
inputs are assigned correctly (see The Input Setup menu on page
26 ).
Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the
remote control.
Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining
on to the remote sensor.
2 DIGITAL or DTS does not light when
playing Dolby/DTS software.
These indicators do not light if playback is paused.
Check the playback (especially the digital output) settings of the
source component.
Check the connections of the CONTROL IN jacks (see Operating
other Pioneer components with this unit’s sensor on page 23 ).
When playing Dolby Digital or DTS
sources, the receiver’s format indicators
do not light.
Check that the player is connected using a digital connection.
Other components can’t be operated with If the battery ran down, the preset codes may have been cleared.
Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choos-
ing the input signal on page 37 ).
the system remote.
Re-enter the preset codes.
The preset code may be incorrect. Redo the procedure for entering
preset codes.
Check that the player isn’t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS
sources are converted to PCM.
When commands from the remote control units of other devices
are registered using the learning function, in some cases they
may not be learned properly. In this case, register the commands
again using the learning function (see page 54). If they still do not
work, they may be in a special format that cannot be registered on
this receiver’s remote control. Operate the device using another
remote control.
Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc, the Dolby
Digital or DTS is selected.
When playing certain discs, none of the
receiver’s format indicators light.
The disc may not contain 5.1/6.1 channel material. Check the disc
packaging for more on what audio tracks are recorded on the disc.
En
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Additional information
HDMI
Symptom
Remedy
Noisy or distorted picture.
Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during
scanning, for example), or the video quality may just be poor (with
some video game units, for example). The picture quality may also
depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the
video converter and reconnect the source and display device using
the same type of connection (component or composite), then start
playback again.
Symptom
Remedy
The HDMI indicator blinks continuously.
No picture or sound.
Check all the points below.
This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you
are connecting are also HDCP-compatible. If they are not, please
connect them using the component or composite video jacks.
Depending on the connected source component, it’s possible that
it will not work with this receiver (even if it is HDCP-compatible). In
this case, connect using the component or composite video jacks
between source and receiver.
If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI compo-
nent directly to your monitor, please consult the component or
monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.
If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI compo-
nent directly to your monitor, please consult the component or
monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.
HDCP ERROR shows in the display.
Check whether or not the connected component is compatible
with HDCP. If it is not compatible with HDCP, reconnect the
source device using a different type of connection (component or
composite). Some components that are compatible with HDCP
still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as there is no
problem with displaying video, this is not a malfunction.
If video images do not appear on your TV, try adjusting the resolu-
tion, Deep Color or other setting for your component.
While analog video signals are being output over HDMI, use a
separate connection for audio output.
When Control with HDMI is set to ON, the Even when Control with HDMI is set to ON, the HDMI input
TV/SAT input’s HDMI Input assignment
is canceled.
is assigned for the BD, DVD, DVR/BDR and VIDEO (VSX-51) /
VIDEO 1 (VSX-50) inputs regardless of the Control with HDMI
setting, so use these terminals.
To output signals in Deep Color, use an HDMI cable (High Speed
HDMI® Cable) to connect this receiver to a component or TV with
the Deep Color feature.
Synchronized operation not possible
using Control with HDMI function.
Check the HDMI connections.
The cable may be damaged.
No picture.
Try changing the Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options
on page 49 ).
Select ON for the Control with HDMI setting (see HDMI Setup on
No sound, or sound suddenly ceases.
Check that the HDMI Audio setting is set to AMP (Setting the
page 44 ).
Audio options on page 47 ).
Select ALL for the Control Mode with HDMI setting (see HDMI
Setup on page 44 ).
If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for
the audio.
Turn the TV’s power on before turning on this receiver’s power.
If analog video is being output over HDMI, please use a separate
connection for the audio.
Set the TV side Control with HDMI setting to on (see TV’s operating
instructions).
Check the audio output settings of the source component.
HDMI format digital audio transmissions require a longer time to
be recognized. Due to this, interruption in the audio may occur
when switching between audio formats or beginning playback.
Turning on/off the device connected to this unit’s HDMI OUT
terminal during playback, or disconnecting/connecting the HDMI
cable during playback, may cause noise or interrupted audio.
En
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Additional information
USB interface
Troubleshooting 2
Symptoms
Causes
Remedies
AVNavigator
The folders/files stored on a
USB memory device are not
displayed.
The folders/files are currently
stored in a region other than the
FAT (File Allocation Table) region.
Store the folders/files in the FAT region.
Symptom
Causes
Remedy
AVNavigator cannot be installed.
An error message may
appear if there are not
enough system resources tions active.
available.
Re-start the PC, then start the installer
(AVNV_XXX_xxx.exe) with no other applica-
The number of levels in a folder is Limit the maximum number of levels in a
more than 8.
folder to 8 (page 30).
There are more than 30 000 fold-
ers/files stored in a USB memory stored in a USB memory device to 30 000
device.
Limit the maximum number of folders/files
Installation of AVNavigator Try the following, in the order indicated.
may fail because of incom- 1. If there are any other applications active,
patibilities with other
applications.
(page 30).
The audio files are copyrighted.
Copyrighted audio files stored on a USB
memory device cannot be played back
(page 30).
exit the other applications and try starting the
installer (AVNV_XXX_xxx.exe) again.
2. If that does not work, try restarting your PC,
and starting the installer (AVNV_XXX_xxx.exe)
with no other applications active.
A USB memory device is not
recognized.
The USB memory device does not Try using a USB memory device compatible
support the mass storage class
specifications.
with the mass storage class specifications.
Note that there are cases where even the
audio files stored on a USB memory device
compatible with the mass storage class
specifications are not played back on this
receiver (page 30).
Software updating does not oper- There may be a problem
ate well.
Contact your contracted provider.
with your Internet Service
Provider’s network.
AVNavigator does not interact
well with the receiver.
The receiver’s power is not Turn the receiver’s power on. (Wait about 60
turned on.
seconds after the power turns on for network
functions to start.)
Connect the USB memory device and
switch on this receiver (page 22).
The receiver or computer
is not connected to the
LAN.
Connect a LAN cable to the receiver or com-
puter (page 21).
A USB hub is currently being
used.
This receiver does not support USB hubs
(page 30).
This receiver recognizes the USB Switch off and on again this receiver.
memory device as a fraud.
The router’s power is off.
Turn the router’s power on.
AVNavigator’s network
settings are not correct.
If your router does not support DHCP, the
receiver’s IP address must be set in AVNavi-
gator. First set the IP address on the receiver,
then set the same address in AVNavigator
(page 67).
A USB memory device is
Some formats of USB memory
Check whether the format of your USB
connected and displayed, but devices, including FAT 12, NTFS, memory device is either FAT 16 or FAT 32.
the audio files stored on the
USB memory device cannot
be played back.
and HFS, cannot be played back Note that the FAT 12, NTFS, and HFS for-
on this receiver.
mats cannot be played back on this receiver
(page 30).
The receiver’s port number Click Settings on the AVNavigator’s function
setting has been changed. menu, select the IP Address tab and input the
changed port number (one of the port numbers
The file format cannot be properly See the list of file formats that can be
played back on this receiver.
played back on this receiver (page 31).
set on the receiver) (page 68).
Cannot detect USB keyboard. The USB keyboard is routed
This receiver is not compatible with USB
hubs. Plug the keyboard directly into the
receiver.
through a USB hub.
Network connections
Check the computer’s network settings,
could be restricted due to security settings, etc.
the computer’s network
settings, security settings,
etc.
A PS2 keyboard is routed through PS2 keyboards cannot be used with this
a PS2/USB connector.
receiver, even if routed through a PS2/USB
connector. Use a USB keyboard.
When the Wiring Navi,
This is because of the
browser’s security func-
tion.
This is not a problem. Perform the operation
to authorize the blocked contents.
Keyboard is not a USB HID Class Some devices will not be detected. Use a
device. USB HID Class keyboard.
Keyboard is not US-international Use a US-international layout keyboard. NB:
layout keyboard. Some characters cannot be entered.
Interactive Manual, Glossary or
Software Update is launched, a
warning about security protection
appears on the browser.
Cannot enter correct text
using the USB keyboard.
En
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Additional information
HOME MEDIA GALLERY
Symptoms
Causes
Remedies
Cannot access
the component
connected to the
network.
The component connected to the
network is not properly set.
If the client is automatically authorized, you need
to enter the corresponding information again.
Check whether the connection status is set to
“Do not authorize”.
Symptoms
Causes
Remedies
Cannot access the
network.
The LAN cable is not firmly connected. Firmly connect the LAN cable (page 21).
The router is not switched on.
Switch on the router.
Internet security software is currently
installed in the connected component. security software installed cannot be accessed.
There are cases where a component with Internet
There are no playable audio files on
the component connected to the
network.
Check the audio files stored on the component
connected to the network.
The audio component on the net-
work which has been switched off is
switched on.
Switch on the audio component on the network
before switching on this receiver.
Audio playback
is undesirably
stopped or dis-
turbed.
The audio file currently being played
back was not recorded in a format
playable on this receiver.
Check whether the audio file was recorded in a
format supported by this receiver.
Check whether the folder has been damaged or
corrupted.
Note that there are cases where even the audio
files listed as playable on this receiver cannot be
played back or displayed (page 43).
Playback does
not start while
“Connecting...”
continues to be
displayed.
The component is currently discon-
nected from this receiver or the power nected to this receiver or the power supply.
supply.
Check whether the component is properly con-
The LAN cable is currently discon-
nected.
Connect the LAN cable properly (page 21).
The PC or Internet
radio is not prop-
erly operated.
The corresponding IP address is not
properly set.
Switch on the built-in DHCP server function
of your router, or set up the network manually
according to your network environment (page
67).
There is heavy traffic on the network
with the Internet being accessed on
the same network.
Use 100BASE-TX to access the components on
the network.
The IP address is being automatically
configured.
The automatic configuration process takes time.
Please wait.
When in the DMR mode, depending
on the external controller being used,
playback may be interrupted when a
volume operation is performed from
the controller.
In this case, adjust the volume from the receiver
or remote control.
The audio files
stored on compo-
nents on the net-
work, such as a PC,
cannot be played
back.
Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Install Windows Media Player 11 or Windows
Media Player 12 is not currently
installed on your PC.
Media Player 12 on your PC (page 39).
Audio files were recorded in formats
other than MP3, WAV (LPCM only),
MPEG-4 AAC, FLAC, and WMA.
Play back audio files recorded in MP3, WAV
(LPCM only), MPEG-4 AAC, FLAC, or WMA. Note
that some audio files recorded in these formats
may not be played back on this receiver.
Cannot access
Windows Media
Player 11 or
Windows Media
Player 12.
In case of Windows Media Player
11: You are currently logged onto
the domain through your PC with
Windows XP or Windows Vista
installed.
In case of Windows Media Player
12: You are currently logged onto
the domain through your PC with
Windows 7 installed.
Instead of logging onto the domain, log onto the
local machine (page 40).
Audio files recorded in MPEG-4 AAC
or FLAC are being played back on
Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Player 11 or Windows Media Player 12. Try using
Audio files recorded in MPEG-4 AAC or FLAC
cannot be played back on Windows Media
Media Player 12.
another server. Refer to the operation manual
supplied with your server.
The component connected to the
network is not properly operated.
Check whether the component is affected by
special circumstances or is in the sleep mode.
Try rebooting the component if necessary.
Cannot listen to
Internet radio sta-
tions.
The firewall settings for components
on the network are currently in opera- the network.
tion.
Check the firewall settings for components on
The component connected to the
network does not permit file sharing.
Try changing the settings for the component
connected to the network.
You are currently disconnected from
the Internet.
Check the connection settings for components
on the network, and consult with your network
service provider if necessary (page 67).
The folder stored on the component
connected to the network has been
deleted or damaged.
Check the folder stored on the component con-
nected to the network.
The broadcasts from an Internet radio There are cases where you cannot listen to
station are stopped or interrupted.
some Internet radio stations even when they are
listed in the list of Internet radio stations on this
receiver (page 40).
Network connections could be
restricted due to the computer’s net-
work settings, security settings, etc.
Check the computer’s network settings, security
settings, etc.
En
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Additional information
!
Avoid using devices generating electro-
magnetic waves as much as possible
when using the system with the wireless
LAN.
Symptoms
Causes
Remedies
Troubleshooting of wireless
LAN
The Home Media
Gallery cannot be
operated with the
buttons on the
The remote control is not currently set Press HMG to set the remote control to the
to the Home Media Gallery mode.
Home Media Gallery mode (page 40).
Network cannot be accessed via wireless
LAN.
Multiple wireless LAN converters are con-
nected to the wireless LAN router.
remote control.
Wireless LAN converter’s power is not on.
(Wireless LAN converter’s “Power”, “WPS”
and “Wireless” indicators are not all lit.)
!
When connecting multiple wireless LAN
converters, their IP addresses must be
changed. For example, if the wireless
LAN router’s IP address is “192.168.1.1”,
set the first wireless LAN converter’s IP
address to “192.168.1.249”, the second
wireless LAN converter’s IP address to
“192.168.1.248”, using values between 2
and 249 (such as “249” and “248”) that
are not assigned to other wireless LAN
converters or to other devices.
SIRIUS radio messages
Status messages
Causes
Remedy
!
Check that the USB cable connect-
ing the wireless LAN converter to the
receiver’s DC OUTPUT for WIRELESS
LAN terminal is properly connected.
Antenna Error
The SIRIUS antenna is not prop-
erly connected.
The SiriusConnectTM tuner is not Check that the 8 pin mini DIN cable and AC
Check that the antenna cable is attached
securely.
Check Sirius Tuner
Acquiring Signal
properly connected.
Adapter are attached securely.
The SIRIUS signal is too weak at
the current location.
Check for antenna obstructions and reposi-
tion the SIRIUS antenna to get better signal
reception. Use the Antenna Aiming option
to optimize the antenna position.
WLAN POW ERR is displayed on the receiv-
er’s display window.
!
There is a problem with the wireless
LAN converter’s power supply. Turn the
receiver’s power off, then disconnect
the USB cable, reconnect the USB cable
and turn the receiver’s power back on.
If WLAN POW ERR is still displayed
after repeating the above procedure
several times, there is a problem with
the receiver or the USB cable. Unplug
the receiver from the wall and call a
Pioneer authorized independent service
company.
Subscription Updating
Updating Channels
Invalid Channel
Unit is updating subscription.
Unit is updating channels.
Wait until the encryption code has been
updated.
Wireless LAN connections cannot be estab-
lished between the wireless LAN converter
and base unit (wireless LAN router, etc.).
Wait until the encryption code has been
updated.
!
!
The wireless LAN converter must be set
in order to establish wireless LAN con-
nections. See Wireless LAN Converter on
page 68 .
Selected channel is not available/ Select another channel.
does not exist.
The SiriusConnectTM tuner’s
firmware is being updated.
Firmware Updating
Wait for updating to finish.
The wireless LAN converter is properly
connected to the receiver and the wireless
LAN converter’s indicators are lit, but the
wireless LAN converter cannot be set from
the receiver (the settings screen cannot be
displayed).
The LAN cable is not firmly connected.
Firmly connect the LAN cable (page 22).
!
Wireless LAN converter and base unit (wire-
less LAN router, etc.) are too far apart or
there is an obstacle between them.
!
If DHCP in the receiver’s IP settings is
set to OFF and the IP address has been
set manually, the IP address set in the
wireless LAN converter may not match.
In the receiver’s IP settings, set DHCP
to ON. After the setting is completed,
turn the receiver’s power off. Next, turn
the receiver’s power back on and check
whether the wireless LAN converter’s
settings can be displayed with the
receiver.
!
Improve the wireless LAN environment
by moving the wireless LAN converter
and base unit closer together, etc.
There is a microwave oven or other device
generating electromagnetic waves near the
wireless LAN environment.
!
Use the system in a place away from
microwave ovens or others device gener-
ating electromagnetic waves.
En
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Additional information
If the settings can be displayed,
change the IP address settings of the
receiver and wireless LAN converter as
necessary.
then change the settings of the wireless
LAN converter.
About status messages
Refer to the following information when you come up with a status message while operating the
Home Media Gallery.
Note, however, that making the
advanced wireless LAN settings will not
necessarily improve the wireless LAN
environment. Be careful when changing
the settings.
The IP address settings of the receiver and
wireless LAN converter do not match the
settings of the wireless LAN router, etc.
Status messages
Descriptions
A component on the network, including a PC, is currently being connected.
Wait for a while.
STARTING H.M.G.
!
Check the IP address settings of the
receiver and wireless LAN converter
(including the DHCP setting).
If the receiver’s DHCP setting is “ON”,
turn the receiver’s power off, then turn
the power back on.
Check that the IP addresses of the
receiver and wireless LAN converter
match the settings of the wireless LAN
router, etc.
If the receiver’s DHCP setting is “OFF”,
set an IP address matching the network
of the base unit (wireless LAN router,
etc.).
For example, if the wireless LAN router’s
IP address is “192.168.1.1”, set the
receiver’s IP address to “192.168.1.XXX”
(*1), the subnet mask to “255.255.255.0”,
the gateway and DNS to “192.168.1.1”.
Next, set the wireless LAN converter’s IP
address to “192.168.1.249” (*2).
(*1) Set the “XXX” in “192.168.1.XXX” to
a number between 2 and 248 that is not
assigned to other devices.
The access point is set to conceal the SSID.
Connection Down
File Format Error
Track Not Found
Server Error
The selected category or Internet radio station cannot be accessed.
Cannot be played back for some reasons.
!
In this case, the SSID may not be dis-
played on the access point list screen.
If not, set the SSID, etc., by making the
wireless LAN converter settings on the
receiver manually.
The selected song has not been found anywhere on the network.
The selected server cannot be accessed.
Server Disconnected
empty
The server has been disconnected.
The access point’s security settings use
WEP 152-bit length code key or shared key
authentication.
There are no files stored in the selected folder.
Preset Not Stored
Out of Range
The selected Internet radio station is not currently registered and saved.
The value entered is beyond the permitted range of the network settings.
The license for the contents to be played back is invalid.
!
The receiver does not support WEP
152-bit length code key or shared key
authentication.
License Error
This is displayed when the file you have attempted to register in the Favorites
folder has already been registered.
Item Already Exists
Favorite List Full
Network connections cannot be established
even when the above measures are taken.
This is displayed when you have attempted to register a file in the Favorites
folder but the Favorites folder is already full.
!
Reset the wireless LAN converter. After
this, redo the wireless LAN converter’s
settings.
About resetting
1. Check that the wireless LAN convert-
er’s power is on.
2. Press the wireless LAN converter’s
reset button for at least 3 seconds.
3. Release the reset button.
When the wireless LAN converter is
restarted, the resetting procedure is
completed.
If the problem is not solved after the troubleshooting above, if the screen freezes unexpectedly or if
the buttons on the remote control or front panel stop working completely, do the following:
! Press u STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn off the power, then turn the power back on.
! If the power cannot be turned off, press and hold u STANDBY/ON on the front panel for over 10
seconds. The power will turn off. (In this case, the various settings made on the receiver may be
cleared.)
(*2) Set the “249” in “192.168.1.249” to
a number between 2 and 249 that is not
assigned to other devices.
Try making the wireless LAN converter’s
advanced settings.
!
The wireless LAN converter can be
connected to a computer to make the
advanced wireless LAN settings. For
details, see the CD-ROM included for
the wireless LAN converter. Check the
settings of the wireless LAN router, etc.,
En
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Additional information
6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929;
7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide
patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol
are registered trademarks, & DTS-HD, DTS-HD
Master Audio, and the DTS logos are trademarks
of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS,
Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Important information
regarding the HDMI
connection
There are cases where you may not be able to
route HDMI signals through this receiver (this
depends on the HDMI-equipped component
you are connecting-check with the manufac-
turer for HDMI compatibility information).
If you aren’t receiving HDMI signals properly
through this receiver (from your component),
please try one of the following configurations
when connecting up.
Surround sound formats
Note
! If your display only has one HDMI terminal,
you can only receive HDMI video from the
connected component.
Below is a brief description of the main sur-
round sound formats you’ll find on BDs, DVDs,
satellite, cable and terrestrial broadcasts, and
video cassettes.
! Depending on the component, audio output
may be limited to the number of channels
available from the connected display unit (for
example audio output is reduced to 2 channels
for a monitor with stereo audio limitations).
! If you want to switch the input function, you’ll
have to switch functions on both the receiver
and your display unit.
! Since the sound is muted on the display when
using the HDMI connection, you must adjust
the volume on the display every time you
switch input functions.
Dolby
The Dolby technologies are explained below.
information.
About iPod
Configuration A
Use component video cables to connect the
video output of your HDMI-equipped compo-
nent to the receiver’s component video input.
The receiver can then convert the analog com-
ponent video signal to a digital HDMI signal for
transmission to the display. For this configu-
ration, use the most convenient connection
(digital is recommended) for sending audio to
the receiver. See the operating instructions for
more on audio connections.
“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made
for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory
has been designed to connect specifically to
iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has
been certified by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards. Apple is not respon-
sible for the operation of this device or its com-
pliance with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory
with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless
performance.
Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround
EX” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
Cleaning the unit
! Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off
dust and dirt.
! When the surface is dirty, wipe with a soft
cloth dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted
five or six times with water, and wrung out
well, and then wipe again with a dry cloth. Do
not use furniture wax or cleansers.
! Never use thinners, benzene, insecticide
sprays or other chemicals on or near this unit,
since these will corrode the surface.
DTS
The DTS technologies are explained below.
information.
Note
Apple, AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod shuffle,
iPod nano, iPod classic, iPod touch, iTunes and
Mac are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
! The picture quality will change slightly during
conversion.
Configuration B
Connect your HDMI-equipped component
directly to the display using an HDMI cable.
Then use the most convenient connection
(digital is recommended) for sending audio
to the receiver. See the operating instruc-
tions for more on audio connections. Set the
display volume to minimum when using this
configuration.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent
#’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;
En
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Additional information
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
About SIRIUS
Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input
signal formats
The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats, depending on the
Stream Direct mode (see Using Stream Direct on page 37 ) you have selected.
Stereo (2 channel) signal formats
SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos
are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its
subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Service not
available in Alaska and Hawaii.
Auto Surround / ALC /
Input signal format
PURE DIRECT
DIRECT
Surround Back speaker(s): Connected
Dolby Digital Surround
DTS Surround
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
Neo:6 CINEMA
Stereo playback
As above
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
Neo:6 CINEMA
Stereo playback
ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)
PCM DIRECT
About FLAC
FLAC Decoder
Copyright © 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005,
2006, 2007
Other stereo sources
Analog sources
PCM sources
As above
DVD-A sources
As above
As above
Josh Coalson
SACD sources
As above
Stereo playback
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permit-
ted provided that the following conditions are
met:
! Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected
Dolby Digital Surround
DTS Surround
2 Pro Logic II MOVIE
Neo:6 CINEMA
Stereo playback
As above
2 Pro Logic II MOVIE
Neo:6 CINEMA
Stereo playback
ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)
PCM DIRECT
Other stereo sources
Analog sources
PCM sources
As above
! Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
DVD-A sources
As above
As above
SACD sources
As above
Stereo playback
! Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation
nor the names of its contributors may be used
to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written
permission.
En
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Additional information
decoder can then use for enhanced surround
listening with greater sound detail.
Multichannel signal formats
Glossary
Dolby Pro Logic IIz
Input signal format
Auto Surround / ALC
PURE DIRECT / DIRECT
Adding a pair of speakers above the front left
and right speakers adds expressiveness in the
vertical direction to the previous horizontally-
oriented sound field. The height channel
strengthens the sound field’s sense of three-
dimensionality and air, producing presence and
expansion.
Audio formats/Decoding
Dolby
The Dolby technologies are explained below.
information.
Surround Back speaker(s): Connected
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
<a>
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
<a>
Dolby Digital EX (6.1 channel flagged)
Dolby TrueHD EX (6.1 channel flagged)
DTS-HD Master Audio ES (6.1 channel
flagged)
DTS-ES (Matrix)
DTS-ES (Matrix)
Dolby Digital
DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1 channel
flagged)
Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio
coding system widely used in cinemas, and
in the home for DVD and digital broadcast
soundtracks.
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
DTS
The DTS technologies are explained below.
information.
DTS sources (5.1 channel encoding)
DTS-HD sources
Straight decoding
As above
Straight decoding
As above
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources
Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected
DVD-A sources/Multi-ch PCM
As above
As above
Dolby TrueHD
DTS Digital Surround
Dolby TrueHD is the lossless encoding technol-
ogy developed for high-definition optical discs
in the upcoming era.
DTS Digital Surround is a 5.1-channel audio
coding system from DTS Inc. now widely used
for DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, 5.1 music discs,
digital broadcasts, and video games.
Straight decoding
As above
Straight decoding
As above
SACD sources (5.1 channel encoding)
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources
Dolby Digital Plus
As above
As above
Dolby Digital Plus is the audio technology for
all high-definition programming and media. It
combines the efficiency to meet future broad-
cast demands with the power and flexibility to
realize the full audio potential expected in the
upcoming high-definition era.
a
Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is a technology that
delivers master audio sources recorded in a
professional studio to listeners without any loss
of data, preserving audio quality.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
A high definition audio technology by which
Dolby Digital Surround EX
Dolby Digital Surround EX (the EX stands for
EXtended) is an extension of Dolby Digital
encoding whereby a surround back channel
is matrixed into the surround left/right chan-
nels for 6.1 channel playback. This allows for
compatibility with Dolby Digital 5.1 channel
decoding, as well as for decoding using Dolby
Digital EX.
signals can be transferred over HDMI cables.
DTS-ES
DTS-ES (the ES stands for Extended Surround)
is a decoder that is capable of decoding both
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1
encoded sources.
DTS Neo:6
DTS Neo:6 can generate 7.1 channel surround
sound from any matrixed stereo source (such
as video or TV) and from 5.1 channel sources.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx and Dolby Surround
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the
Dolby Pro Logic II (and Dolby Pro Logic) decod-
ing system.
DTS Neural Surround
Dolby Surround is an encoding system which
embeds surround sound information within
a stereo soundtrack, which a Dolby Pro Logic
DTS Neural Surround can generate 7.1 chan-
nel surround sound from any matrixed stereo
source (such as video or TV).
En
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Additional information
Decoding
PQLS
ARC (Audio Return Channel)
A technology for converting digital signals
that have been compressed upon recording
by a digital signal processing circuit, etc., into
the original signals. The term “decoding” (or
“matrix decoding”) is also used for the technol-
ogy which converts 2-channel sound sources
into multiple channels or expands 5.1-channel
signals into 6.1 or 7.1 channels.
Jitterless high quality playback is possible by
connecting a PQLS-compatible player with
HDMI connections.
When a TV supporting the HDMI ARC (Audio
Return Channel) function is connected to the
receiver, the sound of the TV can be input via
the HDMI OUT terminal.
The sound of the TV can be input from the
receiver’s HDMI OUT terminal, so connection
with the TV can be completed with a single
HDMI cable.
ALC (Auto Level Control)
In the Auto level control (ALC) mode, this
receiver equalizes playback sound levels.
Also, the low and high frequency sounds, dia-
logs, surround effects, etc., that are difficult to
hear when the volume is low are adjusted to be
optimal for the volume level. This mode is par-
ticularly optimum when listening at night.
FLAC
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec) is an audio
format allows lossless codec. Audio is com-
pressed in FLAC without any loss in quality.
For more details about FLAC, visit the following
website:
Calibrating the sound field/
Improving the sound quality
Network function
AirPlay
Front Stage Surround Advance
With the Front Stage Surround Advance fea-
ture, you can enjoy seamless, natural surround
sound effects using only the front speakers,
without deteriorating the quality of the original
sound.
This receiver supports AirPlay audio streaming
from iPod touch (2nd, 3rd and 4th generations),
iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPad with iOS 4.2 or later,
and iTunes 10.1 (Mac and PC) or later.
For more information, see the Apple website
(http://www.apple.com).
Phase Control
Windows Media
The Phase Control technology incorporated into
this receiver’s design provides coherent sound
reproduction through the use of phase match-
ing for an optimal sound image at your listening
position.
Windows Media is a multimedia framework for
media creation and distribution for Microsoft
Windows. Windows Media is either a regis-
tered trademark or trademark of Microsoft
Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
Use an application licensed by Microsoft
Corporation to author, distribute, or play
Windows Media formatted content. Using
an application unauthorized by Microsoft
Corporation is subject to malfunction.
MCACC
DLNA
Virtual Surround Back
The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but
accurate surround sound setup, which includes
the advanced features of Professional Acoustic
Calibration EQ.
The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a
cross-industry organization of consumer elec-
tronics, computing industry and mobile device
companies. Digital Living provides consumers
with easy sharing of digital media through a
wired or wireless network in the home.
When you’re not using surround back speakers,
selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual
surround back channel through your surround
speakers. You can choose to listen to sources
with no surround back channel information.
Windows Media Player 11/
Windows Media Player 12
HDMI
Virtual Height
Windows Media Player is software to deliver
music, photos and movies from a Microsoft
Windows computer to home stereo systems
and TVs.
With this software, you can play back files
stored on the PC through various devices wher-
ever you like in your home.
This software can be downloaded from
Microsoft’s website.
! Windows Media Player 11 (for Windows XP or
Windows Vista)
vTuner
When you’re not using front height speak-
ers, selecting this mode allows you to hear a
virtual front height channel through your front
speakers.
Control with HDMI function
vTuner is a paid online database service that
allows you to listen to radio and TV broadcasts
on the Internet. vTuner lists thousands of sta-
tions from over 100 different countries around
the globe. For more detail about vTuner, visit the
following website:
Synchronized operations below with a Control
with HDMI-compatible Pioneer TV or Blu-ray
Disc player or with a component of another
make that supports the Control with HDMI
functions are possible when the component is
connected to the receiver using an HDMI cable.
! The receiver’s volume can be set and the
sound can be muted using the TV’s remote
control.
! The receiver’s input switches over
automatically when the TV’s input is
changed or a Control with HDMI-compatible
component is played.
Auto Sound Retriever
The Auto Sound Retriever feature employs
DSP technology to restore sound pressure
and smooth jagged artifacts left over after
compression.
With some audio inputs, the Sound Retriever
effect is automatically optimized based on the
bitrate information of the contents that have
been input to achieve high sound quality.
“This product is protected by certain intel-
lectual property rights of NEMS and BridgeCo.
Use or distribution of such technology outside
of this product is prohibited without a license
from NEMS and BridgeCo or an authorized
subsidiary.”
! Windows Media Player 12 (for Windows 7)
For more information check the official
Microsoft website.
Sound Retriever Air
Windows Media DRM
Windows Media DRM is a DRM (Digital Rights
Management) service for the Windows Media
! The receiver’s power is also set to standby,
when the TV’s power is set to standby.
aacPlus
Sound Retriever Air compensates for reduced
sound quality due to compression when send-
ing Bluetooth signals.
AAC decoder uses aacPlus developed by Coding
Technologies. (www.codingtechnologies.com)
En
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Additional information
platform. It is designed to provide secure
delivery of audio and/or video content over an
IP network to a PC or other playback device in
such a way that the distributor can control how
that content is used. The WMDRM-protected
content can only be played back on a compo-
nent supporting the WMDRM service.
PIN code configuration. This AV receiver sup-
ports both push-button configuration and PIN
code configuration.
Receiver function
Operation Mode
This receiver is equipped with a great number
of functions and settings. The Operation Mode
feature is provided for users who find it difficult
to master all these functions and settings.
SSID
Abbreviation of Service Set IDentifier. A wire-
less LAN access point identifier. Can be set as
desired using up to 32 characters of English
letters and numbers.
Router
A device for relaying data flowing on a network
to another network. In homes, routers often
also function as DHCP servers. Products with
built-in wireless LAN access points are called
“wireless LAN routers”.
Bluetooth function
Bluetooth wireless technology
A short-range wireless communications
standard for digital devices. Information is
exchanged between devices several meters to
several tens of meters apart using radio waves.
It uses radio waves on the 2.4 GHz band which
does not require applications for licenses or
usage registration for applications conducting
wireless exchange of digital information at rela-
tively low speeds, such as computer mouses
and keyboards, mobile phones, smartphones,
text and audio information for PDAs, etc.
DHCP
Abbreviation of Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol. A protocol for automatically assign-
ing such setting information as IP addresses
within network connections. This offers conve-
nience in that, when enabled, it allows network
functions to be used simply by connecting the
devices to the network.
Wireless LAN/Wi-Fi
“Wi-Fi” (Wireless Fidelity) is a trademark
coined by the Wi-Fi Alliance trade associa-
tion to increase recognition of wireless LAN
standards. With the increase in the number
of devices connected to computers in recent
years, Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminat-
ing the complexity of making connections with
LAN cables by using wireless connection. As
a way of reassuring users, products that have
passed interoperability tests carry the logo
“Wi-Fi Certified” to indicate that compatibility is
assured.
Pairing
“Pairing” must be done before you start play-
back of Bluetooth wireless technology content
using the Bluetooth ADAPTER. Make sure to
perform pairing the first time you operate the
system or any time pairing data is cleared.
The pairing step is necessary to register the
Bluetooth wireless technology device to enable
Bluetooth communications. For more details,
see also the operating instructions of your
Bluetooth wireless technology device.
! Pairing is required when you first use the
Bluetooth wireless technology device and
Bluetooth ADAPTER.
WPS
Abbreviation of Wi-Fi Protected Setup. A stan-
dard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance industry
group for a function allowing settings related
to interconnection of WPS-compatible wireless
LAN devices and encryption to be made with
simple operations. There are a number of meth-
ods, including push-button configuration and
! To enable Bluetooth communication, pairing
should be done with both your system and
Bluetooth wireless technology device.
En
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Additional information
vTuner
Advanced Video Adjust
See Setting the Video options on page 49 .
Features index
See Listening to Internet radio stations on page
40 .
Auto Power Down
See The Other Setup menu on page 69 .
Operation Mode
See Operation Mode Setup on page 27 .
DLNA
See About network playback on page 41 .
AVNavigator
See About using AVNavigator (included
CD-ROM) on page 6 .
AirPlay
See Using AirPlay on iPhone, iPad, iPod touch,
and iTunes on page 39 .
Full Auto MCACC
See Automatically conducting optimum sound
tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 25 .
Wireless LAN
See Connecting to a wireless LAN on page 22 .
Playback High Resolution audio file
See About playable file formats on page 43 .
Automatic MCACC (Expert)
See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 59 .
Slideshow
Manual MCACC setup
See Playing back photo files stored on a USB
memory device on page 30 .
See Manual MCACC setup on page 61 .
PQLS
Bluetooth ADAPTER
See Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless Enjoyment
of Music on page 34 .
See Setting the PQLS function on page 45 .
Phase Control
See Better sound using Phase Control on page
38 .
ARC (Audio Return Channel)
See HDMI Setup on page 44 .
Standing Wave
See Setting the Audio options on page 47 .
SACD Gain
See Setting the Audio options on page 47 .
Phase Control Plus
See Setting the Audio options on page 47 .
Auto delay
See Setting the Audio options on page 47 .
Auto Sound Retriever
See Setting the Audio options on page 47 .
Height Gain (Dolby Pro Logic llz Height
option)
See Setting the Audio options on page 47 .
ALC (Auto Level Control)
See Auto playback on page 36 .
Virtual Height
See Setting the Audio options on page 47 .
Front Stage Surround Advance
See Listening in surround sound on page 36 .
Virtual Surround Back
See Setting the Audio options on page 47 .
Sound Retriever Air
See Listening in surround sound on page 36 .
Digital Video Converter
See Setting the Video options on page 49 .
Dialog Enhancement
See Setting the Audio options on page 47 .
Pure Cinema
See Setting the Video options on page 49 .
Internet radio
See Listening to Internet radio stations on page
40 .
Progressive Motion
See Setting the Video options on page 49 .
En
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Additional information
ADAPTER PORT terminal..................5 V, 100 mA
WIRELESS LAN ADAPTER terminal
.............................................................5 V, 600 mA
Specifications
Amplifier section
Integrated Control Section
Continuous average power output of 90
watts* per channel, min., at 8 ohms, from 20
Hz to 20 000 Hz with no more than 0.08 %**
total harmonic distortion.
Front (stereo)............................ 90 W + 90 W
Guaranteed speaker impedance....... 6 W to 16 W
* Measured pursuant to the Federal Trade
Commission’s Trade Regulation rule on Power
Output Claims for Amplifiers
Control (SR) terminal.....ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)
Control (IR) terminal ......ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)
IR signal...............High Active (High Level: 2.0 V)
12 V Trigger terminal......ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)
12 V Trigger output type..........12 V, Total 150 mA
RS-232C cable type
...........................9-pin, cross type, female-female
Network Section
LAN terminal .................10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX
** Measured by Audio Spectrum Analyzer
Audio Section
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)
LINE .........................................315 mV/47 kW
Output (Level/Impedance)
Miscellaneous
Power requirements ...................AC 120 V, 60 Hz
Power consumption....................................550 W
In standby
REC.........................................315 mV/2.2 kW
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF, short circuited, A
network)
.............0.2 W (HDMI Setup – Control : OFF)
0.3 W (HDMI Setup – Control : ON)
Dimensions
LINE .....................................................100 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio [EIA, at 1 W (1 kHz)]
LINE .......................................................81 dB
.......... 435 mm (W) x 168 mm (H) x 362.5 mm (D)
(17 3/16 in. (W) x 6 5/8 in. (H) x 14 5/16 in. (D))
Weight (without package) .........10 kg (22 lb 1 oz)
Tuner Section
Number of Furnished Parts
Frequency Range (FM) ......87.5 MHz to 108 MHz
Antenna Input (FM).................. 75 W unbalanced
Frequency Range (AM)........530 kHz to 1700 kHz
Antenna (AM).............. Loop antenna (balanced)
MCACC Setup microphone................................ 1
Remote control unit............................................ 1
AAA size IEC R03 dry cell batteries.................... 2
iPod cable............................................................ 1
AM loop antenna................................................. 1
FM wire antenna ................................................. 1
Warranty card...................................................... 1
Power cord
Video Section
Signal level
Composite Video.......................1 Vp-p (75 W)
Component Video
..... Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 W), PB/PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 W)
Corresponding maximum resolution
Component Video
CD-ROM (AVNavigator)
These operating instructions
................. 1080p (1125p) (Video convert off)
Note
! Specifications and the design are subject to
possible modifications without notice, due to
improvements.
Digital In/Out Section
HDMI terminal ............................19-pin (Not DVI)
HDMI output type...............................5 V, 100 mA
USB terminal............USB2.0 Full Speed (Type A)
iPod terminal......... USB, and Video (Composite)
SIRIUS antenna cable.........8-pin mini DIN cable
! This product includes FontAvenue® fonts
licensed by NEC Corporation. FontAvenue is a
registered trademark of NEC Corporation.
En
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Additional information
KEC 0104
Kenwood 0004, 0006,
0100
KLH 0106
Kloss Novabeam 0008,
0012
Olevia 0048, 0054, 0059 Scotch 0006
Vizio 0004, 0070, 0071,
0108
Wards 0000, 0001, 0004,
0005, 0006, 0009, 0100,
0101
Onwa 0008, 0104
Oppo 0095
Optimus 0105
Scott 0004, 0006, 0007,
Preset code list
0008, 0009, 0090, 0104
Sears 0000, 0004, 0006,
0009, 0101, 0102, 0103
You should have no problem controlling a component if you find the manufacturer in this list, but
please note that there are cases where codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the
model that you are using. There are also cases where only certain functions may be controllable
after assigning the proper preset code.
Optoma 0075
Optonica 0014
Sharp 0004, 0006, 0007, Waycon 0102
KTV 0008, 0100, 0104,
0110
LG 0005, 0052, 0078,
0097
Orion 0025
0014, 0033
Sheng Chia 0014
Shogun 0004
Signature 0001
Sony 0002, 0018, 0029,
Westinghouse 0047,
0051
White Westinghouse
0023
Yamaha 0004, 0005,
0006, 0100
Panasonic 0003, 0010,
0017, 0027, 0105, 0114,
0120, 0121, 0124, 0125
Penney 0100, 0102
Philco 0003, 0004, 0005, 0030, 0031, 0034
0006, 0007, 0100, 0101
Philips 0003, 0004, 0007, 0008, 0009, 0104
0019, 0020, 0101 Squareview 0103
Philips Magnavox 0019 SSS 0004, 0008, 0104
Pilot 0004, 0100
Polaroid 0057, 0106
Portland 0004, 0005,
0006
Prima 0065
Princeton 0097
Prism 0010
Proscan 0000
Proton 0004, 0006, 0007 Symphonic 0008, 0041,
Protron 0055
Proview 0068
Pulsar 0004, 0011, 0099
Quasar 0003, 0010, 0105 Tandy 0014
Important
! We do not guarantee the operations of all the manufacturers and devices listed. Operation may not
be possible even if a preset code is entered.
If you can’t find a preset code that matches the component you want to control, you can still teach
the remote individual commands from another remote control (see Programming signals from other
remote controls on page 54 ).
Logik 0001
Luxman 0004, 0006
LXI 0000, 0006, 0101,
0102
Magnavox 0004, 0006,
0019, 0020, 0037, 0042,
0100, 0101
Majestic 0001
Marantz 0004, 0006,
0062, 0100, 0101
Matsushita 0105
Maxent 0087, 0107
Megapower 0097
Megatron 0006
Memorex 0001, 0005,
0006, 0041
Soundesign 0004, 0006, Zenith 0001, 0004, 0011,
0015, 0099
Starlite 0008, 0104
Superscan 0014
Supre-Macy 0012
Supreme 0002
TV
Pioneer 0004, 0006,
0113, 0115, 0116, 0117,
0119, 0122, 0123
Admiral 0001, 0014
Adventura 0012
Aiwa 0002
Akai 0002, 0100
Albatron 0097
Alleron 0009
America Action 0104
Amtron 0008
Anam 0104
Anam National 0003,
0008
AOC 0004, 0005, 0006,
0100
Apex 0021, 0102, 0106
Audiovox 0008, 0104
Aventura 0103
Axion 0094
Bang & Olufsen 0111
Belcor 0004
Bell & Howell 0001
Benq 0064
Bradford 0008, 0104
Brillian 0109
Brockwood 0004
Broksonic 0104
Candle 0004, 0006, 0012, Dimensia 0000
0100 Disney 0046
En
Carnivale 0100
Carver 0101
CCE 0110
Celebrity 0002
Celera 0106
Changhong 0106
Dumont 0004, 0011,
0099
Durabrand 0041, 0103,
0104
Dwin 0014
Electroband 0002
Goldstar 0004, 0005,
0006, 0007, 0100
Gradiente 0066
Grunpy 0008, 0009, 0104
Haier 0112
Hallmark 0004, 0006
Harman/Kardon 0101
SVA 0088
Sylvania 0004, 0006,
0049, 0079, 0080, 0100,
0101, 0103
Citizen 0004, 0006, 0008, Electrograph 0107
0100
Electrohome 0002, 0003, Harvard 0008, 0104
0004, 0006
Element 0082
Emerson 0004, 0006,
0007, 0008, 0009, 0023,
0103, 0104
0103, 0104
Syntax 0054
Syntax-Brillian 0054
Clarion 0104
Coby 0056
Colortyme 0004, 0006
Concerto 0004, 0006
Contec 0104
Havermy 0014
Hewlett Packard 0053
Hisense 0069
Hitachi 0004, 0006, 0007
Hyundai 0098
Ilo 0089, 0091
IMA 0008
Infinity 0101
InFocus 0074
Initial 0091
MGA 0004, 0005, 0006,
0100
Midland 0010, 0011,
0099
Radio Shack 0100, 0104 Tatung 0003, 0108
Mintek 0091
Radio Shack/Realistic
0000, 0004, 0006, 0007,
0008
RCA 0000, 0003, 0004,
0005, 0006, 0013, 0024,
0035
Realistic 0100, 0104
Runco 0011, 0099, 0100
Sampo 0004, 0006, 0100, Toshiba 0026, 0028,
Technics 0010, 0105
Techwood 0004, 0006,
0010
Teknika 0001, 0004,
0005, 0006, 0007, 0008,
0009, 0101, 0104
TMK 0004, 0006
TNCi 0099
Contec/Cony 0007, 0008 Emprex 0092
Mitsubishi 0004, 0005,
0006, 0014, 0045
Monivision 0097
Montgomery Ward
0001
Motorola 0003, 0014
MTC 0004, 0005, 0006,
0100
Multitech 0008, 0104,
0110
NAD 0006, 0102
NEC 0003, 0004, 0005,
0006, 0100
Craig 0008, 0104
Crosley 0081, 0101
Crown 0008, 0104
CTX 0063
Curtis Mathes 0000,
0004, 0006, 0014, 0100,
0101
CXC 0008, 0104
Cytron 0093
Daewoo 0004, 0005,
0006, 0023
Envision 0004, 0006,
0100
Epson 0061
ESA 0103
Fujitsu 0009
Funai 0008, 0009, 0103,
0104
Futuretech 0008, 0104
Gateway 0067, 0107,
0108
GE 0000, 0003, 0004,
0006, 0010, 0016, 0039
GFM 0080, 0084
Gibralter 0004, 0011,
0099, 0100
Insignia 0085, 0086
Inteq 0099
Janeil 0012
JBL 0101
0107
0036, 0038, 0040, 0043,
0102
Vector Research 0100
Vidikron 0101
Vidtech 0004, 0005, 0006
Viewsonic 0058, 0107
Viking 0012
JC Penney 0000, 0004,
0005, 0006, 0010
JCB 0002
Jensen 0004, 0006
JVC 0007, 0010, 0044,
5064
Samsung 0004, 0005,
0006, 0007, 0022, 0032,
0076, 0077, 0083, 0100,
0110
Sansui 0025
Sanyo 0004, 0050
Sceptre 0072
Daytron 0004, 0006
Dell 0073
DiamondVision 0096
Net-TV 0107
Nikko 0006, 0100
Norcent 0060
Kawasho 0002, 0004,
0006
Viore 0089
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Additional information
DVD
DVR (BDR, HDR)
If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations
If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations
with the preset codes for the BD, DVR (BDR, HDR).
with the preset codes for the DVD, BD.
Pioneer 2014, 2158
Accurian 2092
Advent 2072
Aiwa 2012
Daewoo 2021, 2087
Denon 2026, 2068
Desay 2055
DiamondVision 2042
Disney 2022
Kenwood 2028, 2068
KLH 2070, 2080
Koss 2024, 2069, 2075
Landel 2093
Rio 2087
Rowa 2071
Samsung 2009, 2011,
2015, 2031, 2044, 2068
Sansui 2066
Pioneer 2103, 2150,
2151, 2152, 2153, 2154,
2155, 2156, 2157
Panasonic 2100, 2106
Sharp 2104, 2112
Sony 2105, 2108, 2109,
2110, 2113
Toshiba 2111
Akai 2066
Lasonic 2085
Alco 2070
Allegro 2087
Amphion MediaWorks 2091
2037
AMW 2037
Apex 2002, 2018, 2079,
2080
Apple 2058
Arrgo 2088
Aspire 2073
Astar 2052
Audiovox 2070
Axion 2040
Bang & Olufsen 2081
Blaupunkt 2080
Blue Parade 2078
Boston 2059
Broksonic 2066
California Audio Labs
2068
Durabrand 2090
Emerson 2067, 2082,
Lenoxx 2074, 2090
LG 2019, 2051, 2061,
2082, 2087
Liquid Video 2075
Liteon 2025, 2092
Magnavox 2067, 2076,
2091
Memorex 2066
Microsoft 2077
Mintek 2038, 2080, 2086 Superscan 2067
Mitsubishi 2020
Nesa 2080
Next Base 2093
Nexxtech 2056
Onkyo 2076
Oppo 2041, 2057
Oritron 2069, 2075
Panasonic 2005, 2007,
2017, 2032, 2033, 2050,
2068, 2076
Sanyo 2066, 2083
Sharp 2035
VCR
Pioneer 1035
ABS 1017
Adventura 1005
Aiwa 1005
Alienware 1017
American High 1004
Asha 1002
Audio Dynamics 1000
Audiovox 1003
Bang & Olufsen 1032
Beaumark 1002
Bell & Howell 1001
Calix 1003
Emerson 1003, 1004,
1005
Linksys 1017
Lloyd’s 1005
Proscan 1030
Pulsar 1018
Sherwood 2063
Shinsonic 2086
Sonic Blue 2087
Sony 2003, 2004, 2010,
2012, 2027, 2046, 2047,
2048
Enterprise 2082
ESA 2053, 2091
Fisher 2083
Funai 2091
GE 2016, 2077, 2080
GFM 2043
Go Video 2087
Gradiente 2068
Greenhill 2080
Haier 2094
Harman/Kardon 2030,
2084
Hitachi 2011
Hiteker 2079
iLive 2062
Expressvu 1029
Fisher 1001
Fuji 1004
Funai 1005
Garrard 1005
Gateway 1017
GE 1002, 1004
GOI 1029
Goldstar 1000, 1003
Gradiente 1005
Harley Davidson 1005
Harman/Kardon 1000
Headquarter 1001
Hewlett Packard 1017
HNS 1016
LXI 1003
Quarter 1001
Quartz 1001
Quasar 1004
Radio Shack 1003
Radio Shack/Realistic
1001, 1002, 1003, 1004,
1005
Radix 1003
Randex 1003
RCA 1002, 1004, 1007,
1016, 1020, 1022, 1030,
1031
Magnavox 1004, 1018
Magnin 1003
Marantz 1000, 1001,
1004
Sungale 2054
Marta 1003
Matsushita 1004
Media Center PC 1017
MEI 1004
Memorex 1001, 1002,
1003, 1004, 1005, 1018,
1019
MGN Technology 1002 Realistic 1001, 1002,
Microsoft 1017
Mind 1017
Mitsubishi 1010
Motorola 1004
MTC 1002
Multitech 1002, 1005
NEC 1000, 1001
Nikko 1003
Sylvania 2023, 2067,
2091
Symphonic 2023
Teac 2070
Technics 2068
Theta Digital 2078
Toshiba 2001, 2006,
2049, 2066, 2076
Trutech 2000
Urban Concepts 2076
US Logic 2086
Venturer 2070
Xbox 2077
Candle 1002, 1003
Canon 1004
Citizen 1002, 1003
Colortyme 1000
Craig 1002, 1003
Curtis Mathes 1000,
1002, 1004
Cybernex 1002
CyberPower 1017
Daewoo 1005
1003, 1004, 1005
ReplayTV 1026
Ricavision 1017
Runco 1018
Samsung 1002, 1016,
1022, 1024
Ilo 2038
Initial 2038, 2080
Howard Computers
1017
HP 1017
CambridgeSoundWorks Insignia 2036, 2064,
2065
CineVision 2087
Coby 2029
Curtis Mathes 2089
Philips 2045, 2076
Proceed 2079
Proscan 2077
2091
HTS 1029
Integra 2078
iSymphony 2060
JBL 2084
Hughes Network
Systems 1016, 1020,
1022, 1023, 1024
Humax 1016, 1020
Hush 1017
iBUYPOWER 1017
Instant Replay 1004
JC Penney 1000, 1001,
1002, 1003, 1004
JCL 1004
Sanky 1018
Qwestar 2069
Yamaha 2005, 2068
Zenith 2019, 2076, 2082,
2087
Sansui 1014, 1019
Sanyo 1001, 1002
Sears 1001, 1003, 1004
Sharp 1012
Shogun 1002
Singer 1004
Sonic Blue 1026
Sony 1006, 1009, 1017,
1021
RCA 2008, 2016, 2070,
2077, 2078, 2080
Regent 2074
DBX 1000
Dell 1017
Niveus Media 1017
Noblex 1002
CyberHome 2000, 2088 JVC 2013
Cytron 2039
Kawasaki 2070
DIRECTV 1016, 1020,
1022, 1023, 1024, 1027,
1030, 1031
Dish Network 1029
Dishpro 1029
Northgate 1017
Olympus 1004
Optimus 1003
Orion 1014, 1019
Panasonic 1004, 1008
Philco 1004
BD
If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations
Durabrand 1018
Dynatech 1005
Echostar 1029
Electrohome 1003
Electrophonic 1003
with the preset codes for the DVD, DVR (BDR, HDR).
JVC 1000, 1001, 1020,
1029
Kenwood 1000, 1001
Kodak 1003, 1004
LG 1003
Philips 1004, 1011, 1016, Stack 1017
Pioneer 2159, 2160
Denon 2147, 2148, 2149 LG 2123, 2124
Kenwood 2044
Panasonic 2114, 2115,
2116
Sony 2120, 2121, 2122,
2129
Toshiba 2125, 2099
Yamaha 2134, 2135,
2136
1020, 1022, 1023, 1024,
1025
STS 1004
Sylvania 1004, 1005
Hitachi 2144, 2145, 2146 Marantz 2139, 2140
Philips 2117
Philips Magnavox 1011 Symphonic 1005
Pilot 1003 Systemax 1017
JVC 2127, 2128, 2130,
2131, 2132, 2133
Mitsubishi 2137, 2138
Onkyo 2126
Samsung 2119
Sharp 2141, 2142, 2143
En
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Additional information
Tagar Systems 1017
Tandy 1001
Tashiko 1003
Teac 1005
Technics 1004
Teknika 1003, 1004,
1005
Tivo 1016, 1020, 1021,
1022, 1025
TMK 1002
Toshiba 1015, 1017,
1028
UltimateTV 1031
Unitech 1002
Wards 1002, 1003, 1004,
1005
Yamaha 1000, 1001
Zenith 1013, 1018
ZT Group 1017
Satellite Set Top Box (SAT/PVR Combination)
Pioneer 0126, 0128
Bell ExpressVu 6002,
6003
DirecTV 6070, 6110,
6062, 6113, 6060, 6059,
6114, 6115, 6116
Dish Network System
6002, 6089
Dishpro 6002, 6089
Echostar 6002, 6089,
6003
Hughes Network
Systems 6113, 6114,
6115, 6116
Samsung 6114
Sonicview 6055, 6107
Sony 6062
Star Choice 6032
Tivo 6113, 6114, 6115,
6116
Vector Research 1000
Video Concepts 1000
Videosonic 1002
Viewsonic 1017
Voodoo 1017
JVC 6003
Totevision 1002, 1003
Touch 1017
Motorola 6032
Philips 6113, 6114
Proscan 6110
Expressvu 6002
Satellite Set Top Box
Pioneer 0126, 6097,
Echostar 6002, 6089,
Next Level 6032
Smart 6051
6098, 6145
ADB 6035, 6001
Akai 6102
Alba 6005, 6013, 6011
Allsat 6102
Alltech 6011
Amstrad 6033, 6030,
6044
Anttron 6013
Asat 6102
Austar 6000, 6045
BELL 6160
Bell ExpressVu 6002,
6003
British Sky
Broadcasting 6030
Canal 6105
Chaparral 6034
CNS 6001
6036, 6005, 6003, 6004,
6146
Expressvu 6002, 6004
Fujitsu 6133, 6134, 6135 Pace 6035, 6005, 6030,
Fortec Star 6123, 6023
Fresat 6014
nfusion 6015
Nokia 6025, 6026, 6118, Sony 6062, 6063, 6030,
6119, 6121
Sonicview 6055, 6107
Cable Set Top Box
Pioneer 6028, 6029,
6095, 6099
ABC 6122
Accuphase 6122
Amino 6077, 6078
Auna 6082
BCC 6072
Bell & Howell 6122
Bright House 6074, 6029 Jebsee 6122
Cable One 6074, 6029
Cablevision 6074, 6029
Charter 6074, 6029, 6058 Macab 6040
Cisco 6029, 6028, 6083
Comcast 6074, 6029,
1982
Cox 6074, 6029
Digeo 6029, 6058
Director 6073
Emerson 6122
Fosgate 6072
General Instrument
6073, 6072, 6122
Homecast 6024
i3 Micro 6077
Insight 6074, 6073, 6029 Philips 6012
Pulsar 6112
Jerrold 6073, 6072, 6122 Quasar 6112
Myrio 6077, 6078
Noos 6040
Pace 6074, 6029, 6028,
6106, 6083
Panasonic 6112, 6083
Paragon 6112
Penney 6112
Shaw 6074
Starcom 6122
Stargate 6122
Suddenlink 6074, 6029
Supercable 6072
Time Warner 6074,
6029, 6058
Tivo 6076
Toshiba 6112
United Cable 6072, 6122
US Electronics 6072
Videoway 6112
Zenith 6112
6143
Star Choice 6032
Star Trak 6032
TechniSat 6033
Thomson 6110, 6111,
6014
6031
Panarex 6016
Panasonic 6008, 6009,
6030, 6136, 6137, 6138
Pansat 6016, 6022
Philips 6002, 6113, 6038, 6116
6054, 6060, 6059, 6102,
6103, 6030, 6114
Primestar 6032, 6147
Proscan 6110, 6111
Funai 6070
GE 6111
General Instrument
6032
GOI 6002, 6004
Grundig 6007, 6030
Hirschmann 6033
Hisense 6020
Tivo 6113, 6114, 6115,
Toshiba 6038, 6054,
6039, 6130
TPS 6041
Triasat 6033
Ultrasat 6021
Knology 6029
Regal 6072
Rogers 6029
Runco 6112
Samsung 6095
Scientific Atlanta 6029,
6028, 6027, 6112
Sejin 6077
Mediacom 6074, 6029
Memorex 6112
Motorola 6074, 6073,
6072, 6029, 6122, 6094
MTS 6094
Hitachi 6038, 6049, 6132 Proton 6020
Houston 6002
HTS 6002, 6004
Hughes Network
Systems 6113, 6038,
6054, 6114, 6115, 6116
Hyundai 6016
iLo 6020
Innova 6059
Jerrold 6032, 6128, 6149, Saba 6014
6150, 6151, 6152, 6153,
6154, 6155, 6156, 6157
JVC 6002, 6003, 6004
Kathrein 6096
Lava 6053
LG 6047, 6018
RadioShack 6002, 6111, US Digital 6020
6032
Radix 6036
RCA 6002, 6110, 6111,
6113, 6109, 6061, 6114,
6142, 6144, 6148
SA 6124, 6126, 6158,
6159
USDTV 6020
ViewSat 6048
Voom 6032
Zehnder 6101
Zenith 6042, 6069, 6037,
6125, 6127, 6129
Coolsat 6021
Crossdigital 6043
Digenius 6104
Digiwave 6053
DirecTV 6070, 6110,
6111, 6062, 6063, 6113,
6008, 6038, 6054, 6069,
6060, 6059, 6043, 6018,
6114, 6115, 6116, 6093
Dish Network System
6002, 6089, 6003, 6004
Dishpro 6002, 6089,
6004
Cable Set Top Box (Cable/PVR Combination)
Pioneer 0127, 6029
Amino 6078
Bright House 6074, 6029 Cox 6074, 6029
Cable One 6074, 6029
Cablevision 6074, 6029
Charter 6074, 6029, 6058 Insight 6074, 6029
Cisco 6029, 6083 Knology 6029
Comcast 6074, 6029,
6083, 6076
Mediacom 6074, 6029
Motorola 6074, 6081
Myrio 6078
Pace 6029
Panasonic 6083
Rogers 6029
Shaw 6074
Suddenlink 6074, 6029
Supercable 6072
Time Warner 6074,
6029, 6058
Sagem 6041, 6120
Digeo 6081, 6058
Homecast 6024
Samsung 6070, 6113,
6091, 6043, 6017, 6114,
6093
Tivo 6076
Scientific Atlanta 6029
Sanyo 6046
Sat Cruiser 6015
Schwaiger 6066
SEI 6139
Siemens 6007, 6036
SKY 6042, 6059, 6030,
6031
Marantz 6102
McIntosh 6032
Mitsubishi 6038
Motorola 6032, 6042
NEC 6050, 6131
Netsat 6059
DX Antenna 6140
E Aichi 6141
SM Electronic 6011
En
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Additional information
CD (SACD)
Pioneer 5065, 5066
AKAI 5043
Asuka 5045
Denon 5019
Fisher 5048
Goldstar 5040
Hitachi 5042
Kenwood 5020, 5021,
5031
Luxman 5049
Marantz 5033
Onkyo 5017, 5018, 5030, Sony 5012, 5023, 5026,
5050
Philips 5022, 5032, 5044 TEAC 5015, 5016, 5034,
RCA 5013, 5029
Roadstar 5052
Sharp 5051
5035, 5037
Technics 5041
Victor 5014
Yamaha 5024, 5025,
5038, 5046, 5047
5027, 5028, 5039
Panasonic 5036
CD-R
Pioneer 5067
Philips 5054
Yamaha 5055
Cassete Deck
Pioneer 5058, 5059, 5070
Digital Tape
Pioneer 5069
MD
Pioneer 5068
En
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To register your product, find the nearest authorized service location, to
purchase replacement parts, operating instructions, or accessories,
please go to one of following URLs :
Pour enregistrer votre produit, trouver le service après-vente agréé le plus
proche et pour acheter des pièces de rechange, des modes d’emploi ou
des accessoires, reportez-vous aux URL suivantes :
In the USA/Aux Etats-Unis
In Canada/Aux Canada
S018_B1_EnFr
PIONEER CORPORATION
1-1, Shin-ogura, Saiwai-ku, Kawasaki-shi, Kanagawa 212-0031, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
340 Ferrier Street, Unit 2, Markham, Ontario L3R 2Z5, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
5 Arco Lane, Heatherton, Victoria, 3202, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270
K002_B3_En
Published by PIONEER CORPORATION.
Copyright © 2011 PIONEER CORPORATION.
All rights reserved.
Printed in China
<5707-00000-491-0S>
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|